IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839


Problem Determination and Service Guide

IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839


Problem Determination and Service Guide

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 251,
and the IBM Safety Information, Environmental Notices and User Guide, and the Warranty and Support Information documents on
the IBM Documentation CD.

Second Edition (May 2009)

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Guidelines for trained service technicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Chapter 1. Start here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Diagnosing a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Undocumented problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Server controls, LEDs, and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Light path diagnostics panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System-board internal connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System-board switches and jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System-board external connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Viewing event logs without restarting the server . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
System-event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Integrated management module error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
About the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Troubleshooting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Intermittent problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Microprocessor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Monitor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Optional-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Serial port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ServerGuide problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 iii

 Remind button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Running the diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Diagnostic text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Recovering from an IBM System x Server Firmware update failure . . . . . 123
Solving power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Solving Ethernet controller problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Problem determination tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839 . . . . . . . . . 127

Replaceable server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components . . . . . . . . 133

Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Returning a device or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Internal cable routing and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Removing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Installing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Opening the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Closing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Opening the bezel media door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Closing the bezel media door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Opening the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Closing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Turning the stabilizing feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tier 1 CRU information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Removing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removing a hot-swap power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing the DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installing the DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Removing the air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Installing the air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Removing a voltage regulator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing a voltage regulator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Removing the rear adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing the rear adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installing the front adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tier 2 CRU information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Installing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

iv IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Installing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing the fan-cage assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Installing the fan-cage assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Removing an optional tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Installing an optional tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Removing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly . . . . . . 190
Installing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly . . . . . . 192
Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Removing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Installing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Removing and replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Installing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Removing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Installing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Removing an extender card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installing an extender card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing a microprocessor and heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Removing a heat-sink retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Installing a heat-sink retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Removing a microprocessor retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Installing a microprocessor retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Removing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions . . . . . . . . 227

Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Using the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Starting the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Setup utility menu choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Using the Boot Selection Menu program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Starting the backup server firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD. . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ServerGuide features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Setup and configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Typical operating-system installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide . . . . . . . 236
Changing the Power Policy option to the default settings after loading UEFI
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Using the integrated management module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture . . . . . . . 237
Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access . . . . . . . . . 238
Logging on to the Web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Using the LSI Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Formatting a hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
IBM Advanced Settings Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Updating IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Contents v
 Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . 249

Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . 249
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IBM Taiwan product service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . .
253
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . .
253
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . .
253
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement . . . . . . . .
253
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . .
253
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . .
254
People's Republic of China Class A warning statement. . . . . . . . .
255
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement 255
Korean Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

vi IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.

Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.

Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.

Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.

Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.

Avant d’installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.

Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.

Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.

Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.

Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.

Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 vii

Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.

Inspecting for unsafe conditions

Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
an IBM product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed and
manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service technicians
from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items. Use good
judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by non-IBM
alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not addressed in
this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the
hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you work on the
product.

Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.

To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in “Power
cords” on page 130.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.

viii IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment
Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, power surges, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.

Safety ix
Safety statements
Important:

Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.

For example, if a caution statement is labeled "Statement 1," translations for that
caution statement are in the Safety Information document under "Statement 1."

Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the
server or optional device before you install the device.

Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified

telecommunication line cord.

x IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 1:

DANGER

Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is

hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.

To Connect: To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF.

2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet. 4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.

Safety xi
 Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

xii IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 3:

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

Class 1 Laser Product

Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A` Laser de Classe 1

Safety xiii
 Statement 4:

≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb) ≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb) ≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)

CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1

xiv IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Statement 11:

CAUTION:
The following label indicates sharp edges, corners, or joints nearby.

Statement 12:

CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.

Safety xv
 Statement 13:

DANGER
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection
requirements. Refer to the information that is provided with your device for
electrical specifications.

Statement 15:

CAUTION:
Make sure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server
unit is extended.

Statement 17:

CAUTION:
The following label indicates moving parts nearby.

Statement 26:

CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system

whose maximum phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault
condition.

xvi IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace devices
according to Clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.

Safety xvii
xviii IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Start here
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this Problem Determination and Service Guide and
on the IBM Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software
also contains troubleshooting information.

Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server:
1. Determine what has changed.
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced,
or updated before the problem occurred:
v IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware)
v Device drivers
v Firmware
v Hardware components
v Software
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem
occurred.
2. Collect data.
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software
problems.
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.
v System error codes: See “Viewing the test log” on page 87 for
information about error codes.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for
the software or operating system for information about a specific error
code. See the manufacturer's Web site for documentation.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs: See “Light path diagnostics” on page 72
for information about light path diagnostics LEDs that are lit.
v System-board LEDs: See “System-board LEDs” on page 17 for
information about system-board LEDs that are lit.
“Light path diagnostics” on page 72
b. Collect system data.
Run Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to collect information about the
hardware, firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information
available when you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider.
For instructions for running the DSA program, see “Running the diagnostic
programs” on page 86.
If you have to download the latest version of DSA , go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-DSA or complete the
following steps.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 1

 Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4) Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA).
For information about DSA command-line options, go to
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/
com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/erep_tools_dsa.html or complete the following
steps:
1) Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2) In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools
Center.
3) Click Tools reference > Error reporting and analysis tools > IBM
Dynamic System Analysis.
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they
are most likely to solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in
which they are presented:
a. Check for and apply code updates.
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually
caused by IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware), system
firmware, device firmware, or device drivers that are not at the latest levels.

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or

coordinated code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
To display a list of available updates for your server, go
tohttp://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=MIGR-4JT or complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
d) Click System x3500 M2 to display the list of downloadable files for
the server.
You can install code updates that are packaged as an UpdateXpress
System Pack or UpdateXpress CD image. An UpdateXpress System
Pack contains an integration-tested bundle of online firmware and
device-driver updates for your server. Use UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer to acquire and apply UpdateXpress System Packs and
individual firmware and device-driver updates. For additional information
and to download the UpdateXpress System Pack Installer, go to the

2 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 System x and BladeCenter Tools Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp and click UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer.
Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release
dates that are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System
Pack or UpdateXpress image.
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a
list of the problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your
specific problem; however, even if your problem is not listed, installing
the update might solve the problem.
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work
when you enable it; if you make an incorrect change to the server
configuration, a system function that has been enabled can stop working.
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.
See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ to
verify that the server supports the installed operating system, optional
devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is
not supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem.
You must remove nonsupported hardware before you contact IBM or an
approved warranty service provider for support.
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are
installed and configured correctly.
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal
cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to solve the
problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. For information about
performing the checkout procedure, see “Checkout procedure” on page
57.
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a
RAID hard disk drive is marked offline in the RAID array), see the
documentation for the associated controller and management or
controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as
RAID and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or IBM software or devices,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) From the Product family list, select System x3500 M2.
d) Under Support & downloads, click Documentation, Install, and
Use to search for related documentation.
c. Check for troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips.
Troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips document known problems
and suggested solutions. To search for troubleshooting procedures and
RETAIN tips, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

Chapter 1. Start here 3

 1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3500 M2.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
5) Select the troubleshooting procedure or RETAIN tip that applies to your
problem:
v Troubleshooting procedures are under Diagnostic.
v RETAIN tips are under Troubleshoot.
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause
unpredictable results. Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in
a system or operating-system log. For more information, see
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 59 and Chapter 5, “Removing and
replacing server components,” on page 133. Hardware errors are also
indicated by light path diagnostics LEDs.
A single problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not
diagnose the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible.
If the problem remains, contact IBM or an approved warranty service
provider for assistance with additional problem determination and possible
hardware replacement. To open an online service request, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be prepared to provide information
about any error codes and collected data.

Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by IBM. After you have verified
that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations are valid,
and no light path diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware component
failure, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. To
open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be
prepared to provide information about any error codes and collected data and the
problem determination procedures that you have used.

4 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 2. Introduction
This Problem Determination and Service Guide contains information to help you
solve problems that might occur in your IBM® System x3500 M2 Type 7839 server.
It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and
suggested actions, and instructions for replacing failing components.

Replaceable components are of four types:

v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

Related documentation
In addition to this document, the following documentation also comes with the
server:
v Installation and User's Guide
This document is in Portable Document Format (PDF) on the IBM Documentation
CD. It provides general information about setting up and cabling the server,
including information about features, and how to configure the server. It also
contains detailed instructions for installing, removing, and connecting optional
devices that the server supports.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed document contains instructions for installing the server in a rack.
v Safety Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains translated
caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger statement that appears
in the documentation has a number that you can use to locate the corresponding
statement in your language in the Safety Information document.
v Warranty and Support Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains information
about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance.
v Environmental Notices and User's Guide
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains translated
environmental notices.
v IBM License Agreement for Machine Code
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It provides translated
versions of the IBM License Agreement for Machine Code for your product.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 5

 v IBM MCP Linux License Information and Attributions
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It provides the
open-source notices.

The System x and xSeries Tools Center is an online information center that
contains information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying firmware,
device drivers, and operating systems. The System x and xSeries Tools Center is at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp

Depending on the server model, additional documentation might be included on the

IBM Documentation CD.

The server might have features that are not described in the documentation that
comes with the server. The documentation might be updated occasionally to include
information about those features, or technical updates might be available to provide
additional information that is not included in the server documentation. These
updates are available from the IBM Web site. To check for updated documentation
and technical updates, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Publications lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3500 and click Continue.

Notices and statements in this document

The caution and danger statements in this document are also in the multilingual
Safety Information document, which is on the IBM System x Documentation CD.
Each statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding statement in the
Safety Information document.

The following notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage might` occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

6 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Features and specifications
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the
server. Depending on the server model, some features might not be available, or
some specifications might not apply.

Chapter 2. Introduction 7
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor: Hot-swap fans: ServeRAID SAS controller:
v Intel® Xeon® dual-core or quad-core with v Three (standard) v ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller that
integrated memory controller and Quick Path v Upgradeable to six fans (for redundant supports RAID levels 0, 1, 1E (standard)
Interconnect (QPI) architecture cooling)
v Designed for LGA 1366 socket v Upgradeable to ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA
v Scalable up to four cores Note: To upgrade to redundant cooling, install Controller, which supports RAID levels 0, 1, 5,
v 32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data cache, the redundant power and cooling option kit. The 6, 10
and 8 MB cache that is shared among the kit includes one 920-watt hot-swap v Upgradeable to ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA
cores power-supply and three hot-swap fans. Controller, which supports RAID levels 0, 1, 5,
v Support for up to two microprocessors, second 6, 10
microprocessor with pluggable VRM Size:
v Support for Intel Extended Memory 64 v Tower Acoustical noise emissions:
Technology (EM64T) – Height: 440 mm (17.3 in.) v Sound power, idle: 5.5 bel declared
– Depth: 767 mm (30.2 in.) v Sound power, operating: 6.0 bel declared
Note: Use the Setup utility to determine the type – Width: 218 mm (8.6 in.)
and speed of the microprocessors. For a list of – Weight: approximately 38 kg (84 lb) when Environment:
supported microprocessors, see fully configured or 20 kg (42 lb) minimum v Air temperature:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/ v Rack – Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50.0°F to 95.0°F);
compat/us/. – 5U altitude: 0 to 915 m (3000 ft)
– Height: 218 mm (8.6 in.) – Server on: 10°C to 32°C (50.0°F to 90.0°F);
Memory: – Depth: 702 mm (27.6 in.) altitude: 915 m (3000 ft) to 2134 m (7000 ft)
v Sixteen DIMM connectors (eight per – Width: 424 mm (16.7 in.) – Server on: 10°C to 28°C (50.0°F to 83.0°F);
microprocessor) – Weight: approximately 34 kg (75 lb) when altitude: 2134 m (7000 ft) to 3050 m (10000
v Minimum: 2 GB per microprocessor fully configured or 20 kg (42 lb) minimum ft)
v Maximum: 64 GB (128 GB when 8 GB DIMMS – Server off: 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F)
are available) Racks are marked in vertical increments of 4.45 – Shipping: -40°C to 60°C (-40.0°F to 140°F)
v Type: Registered ECC double-data-rate 3 cm (1.75 inches). Each increment is referred to v Humidity:
(DDR3) 800, 1066, and 1333 MHz DIMMs only as a unit, or “U.” A 1-U-high device is 4.45 cm – Server on: 20% to 80%, maximum dew point
v Sizes: 1 GB single-rank, 2 GB single-rank or (1.75 inches) tall. 21°C, maximum rate of change 5°C/hour
dual-rank, 4 GB dual-rank (PC3-10600R-999), – Server off: 8% to 80%, maximum dew point
and 8 GB (when available) Integrated functions: 27°C
v Chipkill supported v Integrated management module (IMM), which
provides service processor control and Heat output:
Drives: monitoring functions, video controller, remote
v SATA: keyboard, video, mouse, and remote hard Approximate heat output:
– DVD (standard) disk drive capabilities v Minimum configuration: 2013 Btu per hour (590
– DVD/CD-RW (optional) v Dedicated or shared management network watts)
– Maximum of two devices can be installed connections v Maximum configuration: 3610 Btu per hour
v Diskette (optional): External USB 1.44 MB v Six-port Serial ATA (SATA) controller (1058 watts)
v Supported hard disk drives: v Serial over LAN (SOL) and serial redirection
– Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) over Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH) Electrical input:
v Support for remote management presence v Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz) required
Expansion bays: v One systems-management RJ-45 for v Input voltage low range:
v Sixteen hot-swap SAS/SATA 2.5-inch bays connection to a dedicated – Minimum: 100 V ac
v Three half-high 5.25-inch bays (one DVD drive systems-management network – Maximum: 127 V ac
installed) v Light path diagnostics v Input voltage high range:
Note: Full-high devices such as an optional v Six Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports – Minimum: 200 V ac
tape drive will occupy two half-high standard (v2.0 supporting v1.1) – Maximum: 240 V ac
5.25-inch bays. – Four on rear of server v Approximate input kilovolt-amperes (kVA):
– Two on front of server – Minimum: 0.60 kVA
PCI and PCI-X expansion slots: v One internal USB tape connector – Maximum: 1.10 kVA
v Six PCI expansion slots on the system board: v One Broadcom dual-port 10/100/1000
– Four PCI Express x8 (2x8 link, 2x4 link) Ethernet controller with Wake on LAN Notes:
– One PCI Express x16 (x8 link) support and TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE) 1. Power consumption and heat output vary
– One PCI 32-bit support depending on the number and type of optional
v One or two expansion slots on the PCI v One serial connector, shared with the IMM features that are installed and the
extender card: Note: In messages and documentation, the power-management optional features that are
– Standard - One PCI Express x8 (x4 link) on term service processor refers to the integrated in use.
the PCI-Express extender card management module (IMM). 2. These levels were measured in controlled
– Optional - Two PCI-X 64/133 slots on the acoustical environments according to the
PCI-X extender card Video controller: procedures that are specified by the American
v Matrox G200eV video on system board National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and
Power supply: ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with
Note: To upgrade to two 920-watt hot-swap v Compatible with SVGA and VGA ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a
power supplies, install the redundant power and v 8 MB DDR2 SDRAM video memory given location might exceed the average stated
cooling option kit. The kit includes one hot-swap Note: Maximum video resolution 1600 x values because of room reflections and other
920-watt power-supply and three hot-swap fans. 1200 at 85 Hz nearby noise sources. The declared
v Standard: One 920-watt 110 V or 240 V ac sound-power levels indicate an upper limit,
input dual-rated power supply below which a large number of computers will
v Upgradeable to two 920-watt hot-swap power operate.
supplies

8 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Server controls, LEDs, and connectors
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on
the front and rear of the server.

Front view
The following illustration shows the controls and LEDs on the front of the server.

Note: The front bezel is not shown so that the drive bays are visible.

System power LED:

v Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has failed.
v Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is not
ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. Approximately 3
minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button
becomes active.
v Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is ready to be
turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on the server.
v Lit: The server is turned on.
v Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the server,
press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface.

Power-control button: Press this button to turn the server on and off manually. A
power-control-button shield comes with the server. You can install this disk-shaped
shield to prevent the server from being turned off accidentally.

Hard disk drive activity LED: When this LED is flashing, it indicates that a hard
disk drive is in use.

Chapter 2. Introduction 9
 System locator LED: Use this LED to visually locate the server among other
servers. You can use IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely.

System-information LED: When this amber LED is on, the server power supplies
are nonredundant, or some other noncritical event has occurred. The event is
recorded in the error log. Check the light path diagnostics panel for more
information.

System-error LED: When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has
occurred. Use the light path diagnostics panel and the system service label on the
inside of the left-side cover to further isolate the error.

USB 2: Connect a USB device to this connector.

USB 1: Connect a USB device to this connector.

DVD-eject button: Press this button to release a CD or DVD from the DVD drive.

Hard disk drive activity LED: When this LED is flashing, it indicates that the drive
is in use.

Hard disk drive status LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that the drive has
failed. If an optional IBM ServeRAID controller is installed in the server, when this
LED is flashing slowly (one flash per second), it indicates that the drive is being
rebuilt. When the LED is flashing rapidly (three flashes per second), it indicates that
the controller is identifying the drive.

DVD drive activity LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that the DVD drive is in
use.

Light path diagnostics panel

The following illustration shows the front LEDs on the light path diagnostics panel.
The light path diagnostic panel is inside the front bezel.

Note: The light path diagnostics LEDs remain lit only while the server is connected
to power.

10 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
For more information about the light path diagnostics LEDs, see “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72.

Chapter 2. Introduction 11
Rear view
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.

Power error LED Power cord

AC power LED DC power LED connector

Video
Serial 1
(COM 1)
Systems Ethernet 10/100/1000
management
NMI button
USB 1 Ethernet
USB 2 transmit/receive
USB 3 activity LEDs
USB 4 Ethernet link
status LEDs

AC power LED: This green LED provides status information about the power
supply. During typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit.

DC power LED: This green LED provides status information about the power
supply. During typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit.

Power error LED: This amber LED provides status information about the power
supply. When this LED is lit, it indicates a power-supply fault.

Power-cord connector: Connect the ac power cord to this connector.

Ethernet 10/100/1000 connectors: Use these connectors to connect the server to

a network.

Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED: This LED is on the Ethernet connector on

the rear of the server. When this LED is lit, it indicates that there is activity between
the server and the network.

Ethernet link status LED: This LED is on the Ethernet connector on the rear of the
server. When this LED is lit, it indicates that there is an active connection on the
Ethernet port.

12 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 USB 1-4 connectors: Connect a USB device, such as USB mouse or keyboard, to
any of these connectors.

Systems management: Use this connector to connect the server to a system

management device.

Serial 1 connector (COM 1): Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector.

Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector.

Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the power-supply LEDs on the rear of the server.

The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs. For more information about solving
power-supply problems, see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 84.
Table 2. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
AC power DC power Power error Description
Off Off Off No ac power to the server or a problem
with the ac power source
Off Off On No ac power to the server or a problem
with the ac power source and the power
supply has detected an internal problem
Off On Off Faulty power supply
Off On On Faulty power supply
On Off Off Power supply not fully seated, faulty
system board, or faulty power supply
On Off or flashing On Faulty power supply
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is faulty but still operational

Chapter 2. Introduction 13
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers
The illustrations in this section show the LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on the
internal boards. The illustrations might differ slightly from your hardware.

System-board internal connectors

The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.

14 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows one additional PCI
Express expansion slot that is available on the PCI Express extender card, if
equipped.

The following illustration shows two additional PCI-X expansion slots that are
available on the PCI-X extender card, if equipped.

Chapter 2. Introduction 15
System-board switches and jumpers
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.

See Table 3 and Table 4 for information about the switch and jumper settings.
Table 3. System-board jumpers
Jumper Jumper
number name Jumper setting
JP1 CMOS clear v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clears CMOS memory.
JP6 UEFI boot v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
recovery
v Pins 2 and 3: Enable the UEFI recovery mode.
Note: If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the jumper is on pins 1 and 2.

Table 4. System-board switch 6

SW 6 Switches Switch description
1 Reserved (default off)
2 Power-on password override when on. (default off)
3 Reserved (default off)
4 When this switch is off, the primary IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. When this switch is on,
the secondary (backup) IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. (default off)

Notes:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. (Review the information in
“Safety” on page vii, “Installation guidelines” on page 133, and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.)
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations
in this document are reserved.

16 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
DIMM 16 error LED DIMM 8 error LED
DIMM 15 error LED DIMM 7 error LED
DIMM 14 error LED DIMM 6 error LED
DIMM 13 error LED DIMM 5 error LED
DIMM 12 error LED DIMM 4 error LED
DIMM 11 error LED DIMM 3 error LED
DIMM 10 error LED DIMM 2 error LED
DIMM 9 error LED DIMM 1 error LED
Microprocessor 2 error LED Microprocessor 1 error LED
Microprocessor mismatch LED

PCI slot 1
error LED
PCI slot 2
error LED
PCI slot 3
error LED
H8 heartbeat
LED

PCI slot 4
error LED
PCI slot 5
error LED
PCI slot 6
error LED

IMM heartbeat Battery error LED System board VRM fail

LED error LED LED

Chapter 2. Introduction 17
 The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI
Express extender card, if equipped.

The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI-X extender card, if equipped.

System-board external connectors

The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors on the system
board.

18 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors on the 2.5-inch hard disk drive
backplane.

Chapter 2. Introduction 19
20 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the server.

If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this
chapter, see Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 249 for
more information.

Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v POST error messages
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test
completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST error codes” on page 24
for more information.
v Event logs
For information about the POST event log, the system-event log, the integrated
management module (IMM) event log, and the DSA log, see “Event logs” and
“System-event log” on page 32.
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 59.
v Light path diagnostics
Use the light path diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72 for more information.
v Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server. See “Diagnostic programs, messages, and error
codes” on page 86 for more information.

Event logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the POST event log
through the Setup utility.
v System-event log: This log contains all IMM, POST, and system management
interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the system-event log through the Setup
utility and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the IPMI
event log).
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically save and then clear
the system-event log through the Setup utility when the IMM logs an event that
indicates that the log is more than 75% full. When you are troubleshooting, you
might have to save and then clear the system-event log to make the most recent
events available for analysis.
Messages are listed on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected
message are displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry
to the next, use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 21

 Some IMM sensors cause assertion events to be logged when their setpoints are
reached. When a setpoint condition no longer exists, a corresponding
deassertion event is logged. However, not all events are assertion-type events.
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface and through the
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program,
and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI
event log), the IMM event log (as the ASM event log), and the operating-system
event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA program.

Viewing event logs through the Setup utility

To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.
v To view the system-event log, select System Event Log.

Viewing event logs without restarting the server

If the server is not hung, methods are available for you to view one or more event
logs without having to restart the server.

If you have installed Portable or Installable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you
can use it to view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log
(as the ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You can also use DSA Preboot to
view these logs, although you must restart the server to use DSA Preboot. To install
Portable DSA, Installable DSA, or DSA Preboot or to download a DSA Preboot CD
image, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA&brandind=5000008 or complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to display
the matrix of downloadable DSA files.

If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of
IPMItool. For information about IPMItool, see http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/
config_tools_ipmitool.html or complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.

22 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Expand Tools reference, expand Configuration tools, expand IPMI tools, and
click IPMItool.

For an overview of IPMI, go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/

index.jsp?topic=/liaai/ipmi/liaaiipmi.htm or complete the following steps:
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM Systems Information Center.
3. Expand Operating systems, expand Linux information, expand Blueprints
for Linux on IBM systems, and click Using Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) on IBM Linux platforms.

You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the integrated
management module (IMM) Web interface.

The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first two conditions generally do not
require that you restart the server.
Table 5. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a Use any of the following methods:
network. v Run Portable or Installable DSA to view
the event logs or create an output file that
you can send to IBM service and support.
v Type the IP address of the IMM and go to
the Event Log page.
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event
to a network. log.
The server is hung. v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot
and view the event logs.
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to
start DSA Preboot and view the event
logs.
v Alternatively, you can restart the server
and press F1 to start the Setup utility and
view the POST event log or system-event
log. For more information, see “Viewing
event logs through the Setup utility” on
page 22.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 23
POST error codes
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.

If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when
you are prompted, for POST to run.

If POST is completed without detecting any problems, the server startup is

completed.

If POST detects a problem, an error message is sent to the POST event log.

The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0010002 Microprocessor not supported 1. Reseat the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2 (if one is installed)
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the
server. If the error is corrected, microprocessor 1
is bad and must be replaced.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
0011000 Invalid microprocessor type 1. Update the firmware (see “Updating the firmware”
on page 228).
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is
lit) with a supported type.

24 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0011002 Microprocessor mismatch 1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
0011004 Microprocessor failed BIST 1. Update the firmware (see “Updating the firmware”
on page 228).
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat
microprocessor 2.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
001100A Microcode update failed 1. Update the server firmware (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 228).
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
microprocessor.
0050001 DIMM disabled 1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 174 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 178).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
0051003 Uncorrectable DIMM error 1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 174 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 178).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
0051006 DIMM mismatch detected Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in
the correct sequence (see “Installing memory” on
page 175).

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 25
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0051009 No memory detected 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing memory” on page 175).
005100A No usable memory detected 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing memory” on page 175).
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory
connectors.
0058001 PFA threshold exceeded 1. Update the firmware (see“Updating the firmware”
on page 228).
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test.
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a
lit LED on the system board.
0058007 DIMM population is unsupported 1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those
that are identified, replace it with an identical pair
of known good DIMMs, and then restart the
server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures
continue, go to step 4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to
their original connectors, restarting the server
after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the
DIMMs in the failed pair with identical known
good DIMMs, restarting the server after each
DIMM is installed. Replace the failed DIMM.
Repeat this step until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058008 DIMM failed memory test 1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
00580A1 Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode 1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing memory” on page 175).
00580A4 Memory population changed Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or
changed.

26 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
00580A5 Mirror failover complete Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure
events.
0068002 CMOS battery cleared 1. Reseat the battery.
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see “System-board
switches and jumpers” on page 16).
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011000 PCI-X PERR 1. Check the extender card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011001 PCI-X SERR 1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2018001 PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected 1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
error
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove both adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 27
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
2018002 Option ROM resource allocation failure Informational message that some devices might not
be initialized.
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in
the PCI slots to change the load order of the
optional-device ROM code.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Start Options, and
change the boot priority to change the load order
of the optional-device ROM code.
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other
resources, if their functions are not being used, to
make more space available. Select Devices and
I/O Ports to disable any of the integrated devices.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Each adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3xx0007 (xx Firmware fault detected, system halted 1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.
can be 00 - 19)
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the
default values.
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.
3038003 Firmware corrupted 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
server firmware.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3048005 Booted secondary (backup) server firmware Information only. The backup switch was used to boot
image the secondary bank.
3048006 Booted secondary (backup) server firmware 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
image because of ABR Settings, and save the settings to recover the
primary server firmware settings.
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power
source.
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, and
then turn on the server.

28 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
305000A RTC date/time is incorrect 1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup
utility, and then restart the server.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058001 System configuration invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in
the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be reseated by a trained service technician
only)
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be replaced by a trained service technician
only)
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058004 Three boot failures 1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new
settings or newly installed devices.
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable
power source.
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the
ServerProven Web site.
4. Make sure that the operating system is not
corrupted.
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and
then restart the server.
3108007 System configuration restored to default Information only. This is message is usually
settings associated with the CMOS battery clear event.
3138002 Boot configuration error 1. Remove any recent configuration changes that
you made in the Setup utility.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 29
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
3808000 IMM communication failure 1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,
and then reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware.
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3808002 Error updating system configuration to IMM 1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the firmware.
3808003 Error retrieving system configuration from 1. Remove power from the server, and then
IMM reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware.
3808004 IMM system event log full v When out-of-band, use the IMM Web interface or
IPMItool to clear the logs from the operating
system.
v When using the local console:
1. Run the Setup utility.
2. Select System Event Logs.
3. Select Clear System Event Log.
4. Restart the server.
3818001 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818002 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update aborted Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818003 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
flash lock failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818004 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
system error Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.

30 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
3818005 Current Bank Core Root of Trust 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature Settings, and save the settings.
invalid
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818006 Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature 1. Switch the firmware bank to the backup bank.
invalid
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Switch the bank back to the current bank.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818007 CRTM update capsule signature invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3828004 AEM power capping disabled 1. Check the settings and the event logs.
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager
feature is enabled in the Setup utility. Select
System Settings>Power>Active Energy
Manager>Capping Enabled.
3. Update the server firmware.
4. Update the IMM firmware.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 31
System-event log
The system-event log contains messages of three types:
Information
Information messages do not require action; they record significant
system-level events, such as when the server is started.
Warning
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature
is exceeded.
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as
when a fan is not detected.

Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of
the message (POST or the IMM).

Integrated management module error messages

The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. For more information about IMM, see the Integrated
Management Module User’s Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Message Severity Description Action
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error An upper critical sensor Reduce the ambient temperature.
high (upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted.
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error An upper nonrecoverable Reduce the ambient temperature.
high (upper non-recoverable) has sensor going high has
asserted. asserted.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going Error A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going Error An upper critical sensor (Trained service technician only)
high (upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going low Error A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
(lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going high Error An upper critical sensor (Trained service technician only)
(upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 12V going Error A lower critical sensor going Check the power-supply LED on
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. the Light Path diagnostics panel
(see “Light path diagnostics” on
page 72).
Numeric sensor Planar 12V going Error An upper critical sensor Check the power-supply LED on
high (upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted. the Light Path diagnostics panel
(see “Light path diagnostics” on
page 72).

32 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going Error A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted.
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going Error A lower critical sensor going 1. Reseat the failing fan n, which
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. is indicated by a lit LED on
(n = fan number) the fan.
2. Replace the failing fan.
(n = fan number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has Error A processor failed - IERR 1. Make sure that the latest
Failed with IERR. condition has occurred. levels of firmware and device
(n = microprocessor number) drivers are installed for all
adapters and standard
devices, such as Ethernet,
SCSI, and SAS.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Run the DSA program for the
hard disk drives and other I/O
devices.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
An Over-Temperature Condition has Error An overtemperature 1. Make sure that the fans are
been detected on the Processor CPU condition has occurred for operating, that there are no
nStatus. microprocessor n. obstructions to the airflow,
(n = microprocessor number) (n = microprocessor number) that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 33
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has Error A processor failed - 1. Check for a server firmware
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition. FRB1/BIST condition has update.
(n = microprocessor number) occurred. Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink”
on page 213 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has a Error A processor configuration 1. Make sure that the installed
Configuration Mismatch. mismatch has occurred. microprocessors are
(n = microprocessor number) compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink”
on page 213 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.

34 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU Error An SMBIOS uncorrectable 1. Check for a server firmware
complex error for Processor CPU CPU complex error has update.
nStatus has asserted. asserted. Important: Some cluster
(n = microprocessor number) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink”
on page 213 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less operating, that there are no
severe state. severe state. obstructions to the airflow,
(n = microprocessor number) that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 35
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to non-recoverable from Nonrecoverable state from a operating, that there are no
a less severe state. less severe state. obstructions to the airflow,
(n = microprocessor number) that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a Critical state from operating, that there are no
non-recoverable state. Nonrecoverable state. obstructions to the airflow,
(n = microprocessor number) that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. operating, that there are no
(n = microprocessor number) obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

36 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A diagnostic interrupt has occurred Error An operator information If the NMI button on the system
on system %1. panel NMI/diagnostic board has not been pressed,
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. interrupt has occurred. complete the following steps:
ElementName) 1. Make sure that the NMI
button is not pressed.
2. Replace the operator
information panel cable.
3. Replace the operator
information panel.
A bus timeout has occurred on Error A bus timeout has occurred. 1. Remove the adapter from the
system %1. PCI slot that is indicated by a
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. lit LED.
ElementName)
2. Replace the extender card.
3. Remove all PCI adapters.
4. (Trained service technicians
only) Replace the system
board.
A software NMI has occurred on Error A software NMI has 1. Check the device driver.
system %1. occurred.
2. Reinstall the device driver.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
The System %1 encountered a Error A POST error has occurred. 1. Recover the server firmware
POST Error. (Sensor = ABR Status) from the backup page (see
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. “Recovering from an IBM
ElementName) System x Server Firmware
update failure” on page 123).
2. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 37
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The System %1 encountered a Error A POST error has occurred. 1. Update the server firmware
POST Error. (Sensor = Firmware Error) on the primary page.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. Important: Some cluster
ElementName) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. has occurred.
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int PCI)
ElementName) 3. Remove the adapter from the
indicated PCI slot.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

38 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. has occurred.
2. Check the microprocessor
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int CPU)
error LEDs.
ElementName)
3. Remove the failing
microprocessor from the
system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the two
microprocessors are
matching.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. has occurred.
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int DIM)
ElementName) 3. Remove the failing DIMM
from the system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the installed
DIMMs are supported and
configured correctly.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 39
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Sys Board Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the system-event log.
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less
2. Check for an error LED on
severe state. severe state.
the system board.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
The Power Supply (Power Supply: n) Error Power supply nhas failed. 1. If the power-on LED is lit,
has Failed. (n = power supply number) complete the following steps:
(n = power supply number)
a. Reduce the server to the
minimum configuration.
b. Reinstall the components
one at a time, restarting
the server each time.
c. If the error recurs, replace
the component that you
just reinstalled.
2. Reseat power supply n.
3. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n Fan Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that there are no
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less obstructions, such as bundled
severe state. severe state. cables, to the airflow from the
(n = power supply number) power-supply fan.
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)

40 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail A Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
1. Reinstall the
microprocessor in socket 1
and restart the server.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail B Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
2.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail C Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives,
hard disk drive backplanes,
and DIMMs in connectors 1
through 8.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 41
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail D Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the optical drive and
the DIMMs in connectors 9
through 16.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall the microprocessor
in socket 1 and restart the
server.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the failing
microprocessor.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail E Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the optical
drive and the PCI adapter.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail F Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Turn off the server and
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives
and the hard disk drive
backplanes.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

42 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor PS n Therm Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that there are no
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less obstructions, such as bundled
severe state. severe state. cables, to the airflow from the
(n = power supply number) power-supply fan.
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V OV Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the power-supply LED
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. on the light path diagnostics
(n = power supply number) panel (see “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72).
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V UV Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the power-supply LED
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. on the light path diagnostics
panel (see “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72).
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V OC Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the power-supply LED
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. on the light path diagnostics
(n = power supply number) panel (see “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72).
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n VCO Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the power-supply LED
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. on the light path diagnostics
(n = power supply number) panel (see “Light path
diagnostics” on page 72).
2. Replace the failing power
supply.
(n = power supply number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 43
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Redundancy Power Unit has been Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Check the LEDs for both
reduced. and is insufficient to continue power supplies.
operation.
2. Follow the actions in
“Power-supply LEDs” on page
84.
Redundancy Cooling Zone 1 has Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Make sure that the connector
been reduced. and is insufficient to continue on fan 1 and fan 4 (if
operation. installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
Redundancy Cooling Zone 2 has Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Make sure that the connector
been reduced. and is insufficient to continue on fan 2 and fan 5 (if
operation. installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
Redundancy Cooling Zone 3 has Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Make sure that the connector
been reduced. and is insufficient to continue on fan 3 and fan 6 (if
operation. installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the hard disk drive
to critical from a less severe state. Critical state from a less LEDs.
severe state.
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for
which the status LED is lit.
3. Replace the defective hard
disk drive.
The Drive n Status has been Error A drive has been removed. Reseat hard disk drive n.
removed from unit Drive 0 Status. (n = hard disk drive number)
(n = hard disk drive number)

44 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Drive n Status has been Error A drive has been disabled 1. Run the hard disk drive
disabled due to a detected fault. because of a fault. diagnostic test on drive n.
(n = hard disk drive number)
2. Reseat the following
components:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
3. Replace the following
components one at a time, in
the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
c. Hard disk drive backplane
(n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 is in critical condition. Error An array is in Critical state. Replace the hard disk drive that
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Drive n Status) is indicated by a lit status LED.
ElementName) (n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 has failed. Error An array is in Failed state. Replace the hard disk drive that
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Drive n Status) is indicated by a lit status LED.
ElementName) (n = hard disk drive number)
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
Subsystem All DIMMs. DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit 1. Update the server firmware to
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory has been reached. the latest level.
Subsystem All DIMMs. Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 45
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for All DIMMs on Memory Subsystem has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
All DIMMs. and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
Memory Subsystem One of the DIMMs.
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit 1. Update the server firmware to
DIMM One of the DIMMs on Memory has been reached. the latest level.
Subsystem One of the DIMMs. Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for One of the DIMMs on Memory has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
Subsystem One of the DIMMs. and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
for DIMM n Status on Memory error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
Subsystem DIMM n Status. DIMMs.
(n = DIMM number)
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

46 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit 1. Update the server firmware to
DIMM nStatus on Memory has been reached. the latest level.
Subsystem DIMMnStatus. Important: Some cluster
(n = DIMM number) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for DIMM nStatus on Memory has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
Subsystem DIMM nStatus. and have the same size, type,
(n = DIMM number) speed, and technology.
Sensor DIMM n Temp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less operating, that there are no
severe state. severe state. obstructions to the airflow,
(n = DIMM number) that the air baffles are in
place and correctly installed,
and that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. If a fan has failed, complete
the action for a fan failure.
3. Replace DIMM n.
(n = DIMM number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 47
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error A PCI PERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
%1. (Sensor = PCI Slot n; n = LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. PCI slot number)
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error A PCI SERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
%1. (Sensor = PCI Slot n; n = LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. PCI slot number)
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)

48 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error A PCI PERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
%1. (Sensor = One of PCI Err) LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and riser card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error A PCI SERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
%1. (Sensor = One of PCI Err) LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 49
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Fault in slot System board on system Error 1. Check the extender-card
%1. LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Check the system-event log
been reduced. and is insufficient to continue for DIMM failure events
operation. (uncorrectable or PFA) and
correct the failures.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the
Setup utility.
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info An IMM network has No action; information only.
completed initialization.
Certificate Authority %1 has detected Error A problem has occurred with 1. Make sure that the certificate
a %2 Certificate Error. the SSL Server, SSL Client, that you are importing is
(%1 = IBM_CertificateAuthority. or SSL Trusted CA certificate correct.
CADistinguishedName; that has been imported into
2. Try importing the certificate
%2 = CIM_PublicKeyCertificate. the IMM. The imported
again.
ElementName) certificate must contain a
public key that corresponds
to the key pair that was
previously generated by the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
Ethernet Data Rate modified from %1 Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port data rate.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%3 = user ID)

50 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Ethernet Duplex setting modified Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
from %1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port duplex setting.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet MTU setting modified from Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
%1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port MTU setting.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit; %3
= user ID)
Ethernet Duplex setting modified Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
from %1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port MAC address
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort. setting.
NetworkAddresses;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2. Info A user has enabled or No action; information only.
(%1 = disabled the Ethernet
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState; interface.
%2 = user ID)
Hostname set to %1 by user %2. Info A user has modified the host No action; information only.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint. name of the IMM.
Hostname;
%2 = user ID)
IP address of network interface Info A user has modified the IP No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user %3. address of the IMM.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.IPAddress;
%3 = user ID)
IP subnet mask of network interface Info A user has modified the IP No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user subnet mask of the IMM.
%3s.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.SubnetMask;
%3 = user ID)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 51
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
IP address of default gateway Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user default gateway IP address
%3s. of the IMM.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
GatewayIPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress;
%3 = user ID)
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2. Info A user has enabled or No action; information only.
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 = disabled an OS Watchdog.
user ID)
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address Info A DHCP server has failed to 1. Make sure that the network
assigned. assign an IP address to the cable is connected.
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) IMM.
2. Make sure that there is a
DHCP server on the network
that can assign an IP address
to the IMM.
Remote Login Successful. Login ID: Info A user has successfully No action; information only.
%1 from %2 at IP address %3. logged in to the IMM.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user Info A user has used the IMM to No action; information only.
%3. perform a power function on
(%1 = Power Up, Power Down, the server.
Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =
IBM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %3 = user ID)
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
failures from WEB client at IP maximum number of login ID and password are
address %3. unsuccessful login attempts being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = from a Web browser and has
2. Have the system
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures been prevented from logging
administrator reset the login
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); in for the lockout period.
ID or password.
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Security: Login ID: '%1' had %2 login Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
failures from CLI at %3. maximum number of login ID and password are
(%1 = user ID; %2 = unsuccessful login attempts being used.
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures from the command-line
2. Have the system
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); interface and has been
administrator reset the login
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) prevented from logging in for
ID or password.
the lockout period.

52 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct
userid or password received. Userid in from a Web browser by login ID and password are
is '%1' from WEB browser at IP using an invalid login ID or being used.
address %2. password.
2. Have the system
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
administrator reset the login
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
ID or password.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct
userid or password received. Userid in from a Telnet session by login ID and password are
is '%1' from TELNET client at IP using an invalid login ID or being used.
address %2. password.
2. Have the system
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
administrator reset the login
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
ID or password.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info A user has cleared the IMM No action; information only.
system %1 cleared by user %2. event log.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %2 = user ID)
IMM reset was initiated by user %1. Info A user has initiated a reset No action; information only.
(%1 = user ID) of the IMM.
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2, Info The DHCP server has No action; information only.
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5, assigned an IMM IP address
DNS1@=%6. and configuration.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
DomainName; %3 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address; %4 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1, Info An IMM IP address and No action; information only.
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4. configuration have been
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint. assigned using client data.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
IPv4Address; %3 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
SubnetMask; %4 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress)
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no Info The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.
longer active. has been disabled.
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now Info The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.
active. has been enabled.
DHCP setting changed to by user Info A user has changed the No action; information only.
%1. DHCP mode.
(%1 = user ID)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 53
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
IMM: Configuration %1 restored from Info A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.
a configuration file by user %2. configuration by importing a
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData. configuration file.
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture Error An operating-system error 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
Occurred. has occurred, and the timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader screen capture was
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog) successful.
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture Error An operating-system error 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
Screen. has occurred, and the timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader screen capture failed.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog)
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
6. Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
Running the backup IMM main Error The IMM has resorted to Update the IMM firmware.
application. running the backup main Important: Some cluster
application. solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.

54 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Please ensure that the IMM is Error The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a
flashed with the correct firmware. The the installed IMM firmware version that the server supports.
IMM is unable to match its firmware version. Important: Some cluster
to the server. solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
IMM reset was caused by restoring Info The IMM has been reset No action; information only.
default values. because a user has restored
the configuration to its
default settings.
IMM clock has been set from NTP Info The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.
server %1. to the date and time that is
(%1 = provided by the Network
IBM_NTPService.ElementName) Time Protocol server.
SSL data in the IMM configuration Error There is a problem with the 1. Make sure that the certificate
data is invalid. Clearing configuration certificate that has been that you are importing is
data region and disabling SSL+H25. imported into the IMM. The correct.
imported certificate must
2. Try to import the certificate
contain a public key that
again.
corresponds to the key pair
that was previously
generated through the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for Info A user has successfully No action; information only.
user %3. updated one of the following
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement. firmware components:
ElementName; v IMM main application
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
v IMM boot ROM
%3 = user ID)
v Server firmware
v Diagnostics
v Integrated service
processor
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user Info An attempt to update a Try to update the firmware again.
%3. firmware component from
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement. the interface and IP address
ElementName; has failed.
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info The IMM event log is 75% To avoid losing older log entries,
system %1 is 75% full. full. When the log is full, save the log as a text file and
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. older log entries are clear the log.
ElementName) replaced by newer ones.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 55
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info The IMM event log is full. To avoid losing older log entries,
system %1 is 100% full. When the log is full, older save the log as a text file and
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. log entries are replaced by clear the log.
ElementName) newer ones.
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer expired Error A Platform Watchdog Timer 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
for %2. Expired event has occurred. timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or
Ethernet over USB interface
Loader Watchdog)
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1. Info A user has generated a test No action; information only.
(%1 = user ID) alert from the IMM.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
failures from an SSH client at IP maximum number of login ID and password are
address %3. unsuccessful login attempts being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = from SSH and has been
2. Have the system
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures prevented from logging in for
administrator reset the login
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); the lockout period.
ID or password.
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

56 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the server.

About the checkout procedure

Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major
components of the server, such as the system board, Ethernet controller,
keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives. You can
also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a
problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than
one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the first error
message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run
the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a

microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a
microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 64 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
sharing external storage devices).
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.

Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “POST error
codes” on page 24. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed,
see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 59 and “Solving undetermined problems”
on page 125.
v For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems” on
page 124 and “Power-supply LEDs” on page 84.
v For intermittent problems, check the system-event log; see “Event logs” on page
21, “System-event log” on page 32, and “Diagnostic programs, messages, and
error codes” on page 86.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 57
Performing the checkout procedure
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?
v No: Go to step 2.
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Turn off the server and all external devices.
b. Check all cables and power cords.
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
d. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
e. Turn on all external devices.
f. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting tables”
on page 59.
g. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel (see “Server
controls, LEDs, and connectors” on page 9). If it is flashing, check the light
path diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics” on page 72).
h. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST
v Successful completion of startup, indicated by a readable display of the
operating-system desktop
3. Are there readable instructions on the main menu?
v No: Find the failure symptom in “Troubleshooting tables” on page 59; if
necessary, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.
v Yes: Run the diagnostic programs (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on
page 86).
– If you receive an error, see “Diagnostic messages” on page 87.
– If the diagnostic programs were completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.

58 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.

If you cannot find a problem in these tables, see “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 86 for information about testing the server.

If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not
working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting tables:
1. Check the operator information panel and the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
“Light path diagnostics” on page 72).
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.

DVD drive problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD drive is not 1. Make sure that:
recognized.
v The SATA channel to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The signal cable and connector are not damaged and the connector pins are
not bent.
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive cables
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive and cables
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
A DVD is not working correctly. 1. Clean the DVD.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 59
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD drive tray is not 1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
working.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.

General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar trained service technician.
problem has occurred.

Hard disk drive problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Not all drives are recognized by Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk
the hard disk drive diagnostic drive diagnostic tests again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the
tests. drive that you removed with a new one.
The server stops responding Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped
during the hard disk drive responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test
diagnostic test. runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.
A hard disk drive was not Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic
detected while the operating tests again.
system was being started.
A hard disk drive passes the Run the diagnostic SCSI Fixed Disk Test (see “Running the diagnostic programs”
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test, but on page 86).
the problem remains. Note: This test is not available on servers that have RAID arrays or servers that
have SATA hard disk drives.

60 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only 1. Make sure that:
occasionally and is difficult to v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
diagnose. attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
2. Check the system-event log or IMM log (see “Event logs” on page 21).
3. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.

Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the 1. Make sure that:
keyboard do not work. v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
2. See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for keyboard
compatibility.
3. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup utility and enable keyboardless
operation to prevent the 301 POST error message from being displayed during
startup.
4. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 61
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The mouse or pointing device 1. Make sure that:
does not work.
v The mouse or pointing device is compatible with the server. See
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse is enabled in the Setup utility.
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

62 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory 1. Make sure that:
that is displayed is less than the
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel or on the DIMM.
amount of installed physical
memory. v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the
Setup utility.
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank
might have been manually disabled.
2. Check the POST event log for DIMM error messages:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a system-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup utility and
enable the DIMM.
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 86).
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the
minimum memory configuration (two 512 MB DIMMs; see the information about
the minimum required configuration on page “Solving undetermined problems”
on page 125).
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair are
matching.
6. Reseat the DIMMs.
7. Replace the components in step 6, one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time.
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a 1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
branch are identified as failing.
2. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMMs with identical known good DIMMs; then,
restart the server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all
identified pairs are replaced, go to step4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in the
failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after you
reinstall each DIMM. Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat step 3 until you have
tested all removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 63
Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The server emits a continuous 1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
beep during POST, indicating “Light path diagnostics” on page 72).
that the startup (boot)
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the
microprocessor is not working
microprocessors match in speed and cache size.
correctly.
3. (Trained service technician only) Reseat microprocessor 1
4. (Trained service technician only) If there is no indication of which
microprocessor has failed, isolate the error by testing with one microprocessor
at a time.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor 2
b. VRM 2
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
6. (Trained service technician only) If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics
LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, reverse the locations of two
microprocessors to determine whether the error is associated with a
microprocessor or with a microprocessor socket.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor, replace the microprocessor.
v If the error is associated with a VRM, replace the VRM.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor socket, replace the system
board.

64 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Monitor problems
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Testing the monitor 1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being
tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
The screen is blank. 1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the
correct connector on the rear of the server.
2. Make sure that:
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power
problems” on page 68.
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
v No POST errors are generated when the server is turned on.
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
4. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.
The monitor works when you 1. Make sure that:
turn on the server, but the
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the
screen goes blank when you
capability of the monitor.
start some application
programs. v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 86).
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 125.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,
replace the system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 65
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The monitor has screen jitter, or 1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider the
the screen image is wavy, location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
unreadable, rolling, or distorted. transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the monitor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct
screen. language (see “Updating the firmware” on page 228).
2. Reseat the monitor
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

66 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Optional-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that was 1. Make sure that:
just installed does not work. v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An IBM optional device that 1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are
used to work does not work secure.
now.
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
device.
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
device before you turn on the server.
4. Reseat the failing device.
5. Replace the failing device.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 67
Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The power-control button does 1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:
not work (the server does not
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
start).
Note: The power-control button b. Reconnect the power cords.
will not function until 3 minutes c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel
after the server has been cables, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b. If the server starts, reseat the
connected to ac power. operator information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator
information panel.
2. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.
v The DIMM is fully seated.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
d. (Trained service technician only) System board
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply
supports.
6. See “Power-supply LEDs” on page 84.
7. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.
The server does not turn off. 1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the power cord
and restart the server.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.

68 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 125.
down, and the LEDs on the
operator information panel are
not lit.

Serial port problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The number of serial ports that 1. Make sure that:
are identified by the operating v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility and none of the
system is less than the number serial ports is disabled.
of installed serial ports. v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
c. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 69
ServerGuide problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
™
The ServerGuide Setup and 1. Make sure that the server supports the ServerGuide program and has a
Installation CD will not start. startable (bootable) DVD drive.
2. If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure that the
DVD drive is first in the startup sequence.
3. If more than one DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is set as
the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary drive.
The ServeRAID™ Manager 1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is connected correctly.
program cannot view all
2. Make sure that the SAS hard disk drive cables are securely connected.
installed drives, or the operating
system cannot be installed.
The operating-system Make more space available on the hard disk.
installation program
continuously loops.
The ServerGuide program will Make sure that the operating-system CD is supported by the ServerGuide program.
not start the operating-system Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html, click IBM
CD. Service and Support Site, click the link for your ServerGuide version, and scroll
down to the list of supported Microsoft Windows operating systems.
The operating system cannot be Make sure that the server supports the operating system. If it does, either no
installed; the option is not logical drive is defined (SCSI RAID servers), or the ServerGuide System Partition
available. is not present. Run the ServerGuide program and make sure that setup is
complete.

Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software 1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
problem. v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you receive any error messages while you use the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact the software vendor.

70 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work. 1. Run USB diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 86).
2. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.
3. Make sure that the USB configuration optional devices are set correctly in the
Setup utility (see “Setup utility menu choices” on page 229 for more
information).
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 71
Light path diagnostics
Light path diagnostics is a system of LEDs on various external and internal
components of the server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.

When LEDs are lit to indicate an error, they remain lit when the server is turned off,
provided that the server is still connected to power and the power supply is
operating correctly.

Before you work inside the server to view light path diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 135.

If an error occurs, view the light path diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the operator information panel LEDs on the front of the server.
v If an operator information panel LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the system-event log.
v If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred; go to
step 2 on page 73.
The following illustration shows the operator information panel LEDs that are
visible through the bezel.

The following table lists the operator information panel LEDs, the problems that
they indicate, and actions to solve the problems.

72 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path diagnostics LED with the
system-error or information LED also lit Description
System power (green) v Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself
has failed.
v Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off
and is not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is
disabled. Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to
ac power, the power-control button becomes active.
v Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to
turn on the server.
v Lit: The server is turned on.
v Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To
wake the server, press the power-control button or use the IMM
Web interface.
Hard disk drive activity (green) When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that there is activity on a
hard disk drive.
System locator (blue) Use this LED to visually locate the server among other servers. You
can use IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely.
System information (amber) When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the IMM event log or
in the system-event log. Check the light path diagnostics panel for
more information.
System error (amber) When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred. Use
the light path diagnostics panel and the system service label to further
isolate the error.

2. Look at the light path diagnostics panel on the front of the server. Lit LEDs on
the light path diagnostics panel indicate the type of error that has occurred.
The following illustration shows the light path diagnostics panel LEDs that are
visible through the bezel.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 73
 The following table lists the light path diagnostics LEDs, the problems that they
indicate, and actions to solve the problems.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
System-event log A system error occurred. View the contents of the system-event log (see “Event
(LOG) logs” on page 21).
Temperature The system temperature has 1. See the system-event log for the source of the
exceeded a threshold level. fault (see “System-event log” on page 32).
2. Make sure that the airflow in the server is not
blocked.
3. Make sure that the room temperature is neither too
hot nor too cold (see “Environment” in “Features
and specifications” on page 7).

74 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
System board (BRD) An error occurred on the system 1. Check the LEDs on the system board to identify
board. the component that is causing the error. The BRD
LED can be lit for the following conditions:
v Failed or missing battery
v Failed voltage regulator
2. Check the system-event log for information about
the error.
3. Replace any failed or missing replaceable
components, such as the battery.
4. (Trained service technician only) If a voltage
regulator has failed, replace the system board.
PCI bus A PCI adapter has failed. 1. See the system-event log (see “System-event log”
on page 32).
2. Check the LEDs on the PCI slots to identify the
component that is causing the error, and reseat the
failing adapter.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Failing adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Fan A fan has failed or is operating too 1. Reinstall the removed fan.
slowly.
2. If an individual fan LED is lit, replace the fan.
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Power supply A power supply has failed or has 1. Check the individual power-supply LEDs.
been removed.
2. Reseat the following components:
Note: In a redundant power
configuration, the dc power LED on a. Power supply
one power supply might be off. b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply
cage cables
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Power supply
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply
cage

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 75
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
DASD/RAID A hard disk drive, SAS controller, or 1. Reinstall the removed drive.
RAID adapter error has occurred.
2. Reseat the following components:
Notes: a. Failing hard disk drive
1. This LED is also lit when a hard b. SAS hard disk drive backplane
disk drive is removed from the
c. SAS signal and power cables
server.
d. System board
2. The error LED on the failing
hard disk drive is also lit. e. ServeRAID adapter
3. Check the system-event log for 3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a
a RAID error. time, in the order shown, restarting the server each
time.
NMI A hardware error has been reported 1. See the system-event log (see “System-event log”
to the operating system. on page 32).
2. If the PCI LED is lit, follow the instructions for that
LED.
3. If the MEM LED is lit, follow the instructions for
that LED.
4. Restart the server.

76 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
Memory (MEM) A memory error has occurred. 1. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit,
Note: The error LED on the DIMM which indicates that the memory configuration is
is also lit. invalid. Reinstall the DIMMs in a supported
configuration.
2. If the CNFG LED is not lit, one of the following
conditions might be present:
v The server did not start and a failing DIMM LED
is lit:
a. Check for a PFA log event in the
system-event log.
b. Reseat the DIMM.
c. Move the DIMM to a different slot or replace
the DIMM.
d. (Trained service technician only) Replace
the system board.
v The server started, the failing DIMM is disabled,
and the LED is lit:
a. If the LEDs are lit by two DIMMs, check the
system-event log for a PFA event on one of
the DIMMs, and then replace that DIMM.
Otherwise, replace both DIMMs.
b. If the LED is lit by only one DIMM, replace
that DIMM.
c. Re-enable the DIMM, using the Setup utility.
Microprocessor/ A hardware configuration error has 1. (The system error LED, CPU LED, and this LED
Memory Configuration occurred. (This LED is used with the are lit when POST detects a microprocessor
(CNFG) MEM, VRM, and CPU LEDs.) mismatch.) Remove and install two
microprocessors of the same cache size, type, and
clock speed.
2. (The system error LED, MEM LED, and this LED
are lit when POST detects an invalid memory
configuration.) Remove and install supported
DIMMs (see “Installing memory” on page 175).
3. (The system error LED, VRM LED, and this LED
are lit when POST detects a missing VRM.) Install
a VRM for microprocessor 2 (see “Installing a
voltage regulator module” on page 170).
4. Check the system error log for information
indicating incompatible components.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 77
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
VRM A VRM has failed. 1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED (for a VRM).
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the
CNFG LED is lit, the memory configuration is
invalid. Reseat the VRM.
3. If the CNFG LED is not lit, reseat the following
components:
a. Failing VRM
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor associated with the VRM
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Failing VRM
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor associated with the VRM
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
Microprocessor (CPU) A microprocessor has failed, or an 1. Check the system-event log to determine the
invalid microprocessor configuration reason for the lit LED.
is installed.
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the
Note: (Trained service technician
CNFG LED is not lit, a microprocessor has failed.
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the a. Make sure that the failing microprocessor,
correct sequence. which is indicated by the CPU1 or CPU2 error
LED on the system board, is installed correctly.
b. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the server
each time:
1) (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
2) (Trained service technician only) System
board
c. If the CNFG LED is lit and the CPU mismatch
LED on the system board is also lit, an invalid
microprocessor configuration is installed:
1) Make sure that the microprocessors are
compatible with each other. They must
match in speed and cache size. Use the
Setup utility to compare the microprocessor
information.
2) (Trained service technician only) Replace
the incompatible microprocessor.

78 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
Service processor bus The IMM detects an internal error. 1. Disconnect the server from ac power; then,
(SP BUS) reconnect the server to power and restart the
server.
2. Update the IMM firmware.

Look at the system service label on the top of the server, which gives an
overview of internal components that correspond to the LEDs on the light path
diagnostics panel. This information can often provide enough information to
diagnose the error.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 79
 3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a
problem.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
DIMM 16 error LED DIMM 8 error LED
DIMM 15 error LED DIMM 7 error LED
DIMM 14 error LED DIMM 6 error LED
DIMM 13 error LED DIMM 5 error LED
DIMM 12 error LED DIMM 4 error LED
DIMM 11 error LED DIMM 3 error LED
DIMM 10 error LED DIMM 2 error LED
DIMM 9 error LED DIMM 1 error LED
Microprocessor 2 error LED Microprocessor 1 error LED
Microprocessor mismatch LED

PCI slot 1
error LED
PCI slot 2
error LED
PCI slot 3
error LED
H8 heartbeat
LED

PCI slot 4
error LED
PCI slot 5
error LED
PCI slot 6
error LED

IMM heartbeat Battery error LED System board VRM fail

LED error LED LED

80 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one
or two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on
the PCI Express extender card, if one is installed.

The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI-X extender card, if one is
installed.

The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and extender card
and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
DIMM 1 to DIMM 16 A DIMM has failed or is incorrectly 1. Remove the DIMM that is indicated by a lit error
error LEDs installed. LED.
2. Reseat the DIMM.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU 1 error LED Microprocessor 1 has failed, is 1. Check the system-event log to determine the
missing, or has been incorrectly reason for the lit LED.
installed.
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
Note: (Trained service technician
microprocessor.
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the 3. Replace the following components one at a time,
correct sequence; see “Installing a in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
microprocessor and heat sink” on a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
page 213. microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 81
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
CPU 2 error LED Microprocessor 2 has failed, is 1. Check the system-event log to determine the
missing, or has been incorrectly reason for the lit LED.
installed.
2. Find the failing, missing, or mismatched
Note: (Trained service technician
microprocessor by checking the LEDs on the
only) Make sure that the
system board.
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see “Installing a 3. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor and heat sink” on microprocessor.
page 213. 4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU mismatch LED A mismatched microprocessor has 1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
been installed. information to compare the installed
Note: All microprocessors must microprocessor specifications.
have the same speed and cache
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
size.
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
VRM failure LED Microprocessor 2 VRM has failed or 1. Reseat the VRM
is incorrectly installed.
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. VRM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
3. Replace the VRM
System-board error System-board CPU VRD, power (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
LED voltage regulators, or both have board.
failed.
Battery failure LED Battery low. 1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.

82 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
IMM heartbeat LED Indicates the status of the boot If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds
process of the IMM. of when the server is connected to power, complete
the following steps:
When the server is connected to
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM
power this LED flashes quickly to
recovery switch to recover the firmware (see
indicate that the IMM code is
Table 4 on page 16).
loading. When the loading is
complete, the LED stops flashing 2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
briefly and then flashes slowly to system board.
indicate that the IMM if fully
operational and you can press the
power-control button to start the
server.
PCI slot 1 to PCI slot An error has occurred on a PCI bus 1. Check the system-event log for information about
8 error LEDs or on the system board. An the error.
additional LED is lit next to a failing
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the
PCI slot.
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
3. If the failure remains, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-
CALL for additional troubleshooting information. for
additional troubleshooting information.
H8 heartbeat LED Indicates the status of power-on and 1. If the H8 heartbeat LED is blinking at a 1 Hz rate,
power-off sequencing. no action is necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) If the H8
heartbeat LED is not blinking, replace the system
board.

Remind button
You can use the remind button on the light path diagnostics panel to put the
system-error LED on the operator information panel into Remind mode. When you
press the remind button, you acknowledge the error but indicate that you will not
take immediate action. The system-error LED flashes while it is in Remind mode
and stays in Remind mode until one of the following conditions occurs:
v All known errors are corrected.
v The server is restarted.
v A new error occurs, causing the system-error LED to be lit again.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 83
Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the power-supply LEDs on the rear of the server.

The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the system power LED on the operator
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

84 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 6. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
AC DC Error Description Action Notes
Off Off Off No ac power to 1. Check the ac power to the server. This is a normal
the server or a condition when no
2. Make sure that the power cord is
problem with the ac power is present.
connected to a functioning power
ac power source
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
Off Off On No ac power to 1. Replace the power supply. This happens only
the server or a when a second
2. Make sure that the power cord is
problem with the power supply is
connected to a functioning power
ac power source providing power to
source.
and the power the server.
supply had
detected an
internal problem
Off On Off Faulty power Replace the power supply.
supply
Off On On Faulty power Replace the power supply.
supply
On Off Off Power supply not 1. Reseat the power supply. Typically indicates
fully seated, that a power supply
2. If the system-board error LED is not lit,
faulty system is not fully seated.
replace the power supply.
board, or faulty
power supply 3. (Trained service technician only) If
system-board error LED is lit, replace
the system board.
On Off or On Faulty power Replace the power supply.
Flashing supply
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty but still
operational

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 85
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages and error codes
are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text
message or error code indicates that a problem has been detected; to determine
what action you should take as a result of a message or error code, see the table in
“Diagnostic messages” on page 87.

Running the diagnostic programs

To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt Press F2 for Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) is displayed,
press F2.

Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive

for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal
operation while the program loads.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.

Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.

If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.

A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a

microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor
socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 64 for information about diagnosing
microprocessor problems.

If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try
running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the
component that was being tested when the server stopped.

Diagnostic text messages

Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:

Passed: The test was completed without any errors.

Failed: The test detected an error.

86 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 User Aborted: You stopped the test before it was completed.

Not Applicable: You attempted to test a device that is not present in the server.

Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration.

Warning: The test could not be run. There was no failure of the hardware that was
being tested, but there might be a hardware failure elsewhere, or another problem
prevented the test from running; for example, there might be a configuration
problem, or the hardware might be missing or is not being recognized.

The result is followed by an error code or other additional information about the
error.

Viewing the test log

To view the DSA log when the tests are completed, select Utility from the top of the
screen and then select View Test Log. To view a detailed test log, press Tab while
you view the DSA log. The DSA log data is maintained only while you are running
the diagnostic programs. When you exit from the diagnostic programs, the DSA log
is cleared.

To save the DSA log to a file on a diskette or to the hard disk, click Save Log on
the diagnostic programs screen and specify a location and name for the saved log
file.
Notes:
1. To create and use a diskette, you must add an optional external diskette drive to
the server.
2. To save the test log to a diskette, you must use a diskette that you have
formatted yourself; this function does not work with preformatted diskettes. If the
diskette has sufficient space for the test log, the diskette can contain other data.

Diagnostic messages
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the column.
Table 7. DSA messages
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-000-xxx CPU CPU Stress Pass CPU passed No action required.
test stress test

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 87
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-801-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted Internal 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test program error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

88 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted System 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test resource
availability 2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
error. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 89
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-901-xxx CPU CPU Stress Failed Test failure. 1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
Test recover from a hung state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-801-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
IMM returned from ac power to reset the IMM.
an incorrect
response 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
length. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

90 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-802-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
test cannot be from ac power to reset the IMM.
completed for
an unknown 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
reason. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-803-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
node is busy; from ac power to reset the IMM.
try later.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 91
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-804-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
command. from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-805-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
command for from ac power to reset the IMM.
the given LUN.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

92 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-806-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
timeout while from ac power to reset the IMM.
processing the
command. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-807-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: out of power source. You must disconnect the system
space. from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 93
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-808-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
reservation from ac power to reset the IMM.
aborted or
invalid 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
reservation ID. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-809-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
was truncated.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

94 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-810-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
length is
invalid. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-811-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
field length limit
is exceeded. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 95
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-812-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C Test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped a power source. You must disconnect the system
parameter is from ac power to reset the IMM.
out of range.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-813-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot return from ac power to reset the IMM.
the number of
requested data 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
bytes. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

96 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-814-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
requested from ac power to reset the IMM.
sensor, data, or
record is not 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
present. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-815-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
data field in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
request.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 97
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-816-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
command is from ac power to reset the IMM.
illegal for the
specified 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
sensor or power source and turn on the system.
record type. 3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-817-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

98 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-818-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
a duplicated
request. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-819-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; the power source and turn on the system.
SDR repository 3. Run the test again.
is in update 4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
mode. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 99
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-820-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; the power source and turn on the system.
device is in 3. Run the test again.
firmware 4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM firmware
update mode. are at the latest level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-821-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; IMM power source and turn on the system.
initialization is 3. Run the test again.
in progress. 4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

100 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-822-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
destination is from ac power to reset the IMM.
unavailable.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-823-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
the command;
insufficient 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
privilege level. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 101

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-824-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
the command.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-901-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
H8 bus (Bus 0)
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Remove power from the system.
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

102 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
I/O Expander
(Bus 1). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the light path diagnostics panel.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 103

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-903-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
host bus (Bus
2). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the
test again after replacing each DIMM.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
16. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
17. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
18. Run the test again.
19. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

104 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-904-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
power supply
bus (Bus 3). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Reseat the power supply.
8. Run the test again.
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
10. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
11. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 105

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-905-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive
indicates a backplane is not installed.
failure in the 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
SAS backplane power source. You must disconnect the system
and the Sensor from ac power to reset the IMM.
bus (Bus 4)
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

106 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-906-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
PCI bus (Bus
5). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-801-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the server
firmware 2. Run the test again.
programmed 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
the memory latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
controller with in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
an invalid this component. For more information, see
CBAR address “Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 107

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-802-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the end
address in the 2. Run the test again.
E820 function 3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the
is less than 16 Setup utility.
MB. 4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-803-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
could not
enable the 2. Run the test again.
processor 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
cache. latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-804-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller buffer 2. Run the test again.
request failed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

108 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-805-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller 2. Run the test again.
display/alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
write operation latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
was not in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
completed. this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-806-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller fast 2. Run the test again.
scrub operation 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
was not latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
completed. in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-807-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller buffer 2. Run the test again.
free request 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
failed. latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 109

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-808-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory
controller 2. Run the test again.
display/alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
buffer execute latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
error. in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-809-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted 1. Turn off and restart the system.
program error:
operation 2. Run the test again.
running fast 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
scrub. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-810-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test stopped: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
unknown error
code xxx 2. Run the test again.
received in 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
COMMONEXIT level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
procedure. http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

110 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-901-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
single-bit error, power source.
failing bank x,
failing memory 2. Reseat DIMM z.
card y, failing 3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
DIMM z. the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see
“Using the Setup utility” on page 229).
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-801-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Internal 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Stress Test program error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the
specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 111

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-802-xxx Memory Memory Failed General error: 1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by
Stress Test memory size is checking the Available System Memory in the
insufficient to Resource Utilization section of the DSA log. If
run the test. necessary, enable all memory in the Setup utility
(see “Using the Setup utility” on page 229).
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-901-xxx Memory Memory Failed Test failure. 1. Run the standard memory test to validate all
Stress Test memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from
power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

112 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-801-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Unable to 1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
Media communicate level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
Installed with the device http://www.ibm.com/support/
driver. docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
v Read/
Write Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Messages Replace the cable if it is damaged.
and actions 4. Run the test again.
apply to all
three tests. 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 228.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 113

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-802-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted The media tray 1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.
Media is open.
2. Run the test again.
Installed
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait
v Read/ for 15 seconds for the media to be recognized.
Write Test
4. Run the test again.
v Self-Test
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Messages or broken connections or damage to the cable.
and actions Replace the cable if it is damaged.
apply to all 6. Run the test again.
three tests. 7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
8. Run the test again.
9. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
10. Run the test again.
11. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
12. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-803-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed The disc might 1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
Media be in use by
the system. 2. Run the test again
Installed
3. Turn off and restart the system.
v Read/
4. Run the test again.
Write Test
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
v Self-Test
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
Messages more troubleshooting information at
and actions http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
apply to all supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
three tests. &lndocid=SERV-CALL.

114 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-901-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Drive media is 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media not detected. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Write Test or broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
apply to all http://www.ibm.com/support/
three tests. docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-902-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed Read 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media miscompare. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Write Test or broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
apply to all http://www.ibm.com/support/
three tests. docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 115

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-903-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Could not 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media access the media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed drive.
2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Write Test or broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
apply to all level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
three tests. http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
6. Run the test again.
7. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-904-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed A read error 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media occurred. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Write Test or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Messages
and actions 4. Run the test again.
apply to both 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
tests. http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
217–800–000 SAS/SATA Disk Drive Aborted Test aborted. Run the test again.
Hard Drive Test

116 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
217-900-xxx SAS/SATA Disk Drive Failed 1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane
Hard Drive Test connections at both ends.
2. Reseat the all drives.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-901-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed An error was 1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
Test found in the cleaning media and install new media.
tape alert log
page. 2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-902-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed Media is not 1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
Test detected. cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 117

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
264-903-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed Media error. 1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
Test cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-904-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed Drive hardware 1. Check the tape drive cabling for loose or broken
Test error. connections or damage to the cable. Replace
the tape drive cable if damage is present.
2. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
3. Run the test again.
4. Clear the error log.
5. Run the test again.
6. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
7. Run the test again.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

118 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
264-905-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed Software error: 1. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
Test invalid request. and restart the system and then run the test
again.
2. Check system firmware level and upgrade if
necessary. The installed firmware level can be
found in the DSA Log within the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. The latest level
firmware for this component can be found at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
and restart the system.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-906-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive Failed Unrecognized 1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
Test error. cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 119

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-901-xxx Broadcom Test Control Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Registers latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx Broadcom Test MII Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Registers latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-902-xxx Broadcom Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet EEPROM latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

120 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-903-xxx Broadcom Test Internal Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Memory latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 229) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-904-xxx Broadcom Test Interrupt Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 229) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 121

Table 7. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-905-xxx Broadcom Test Loop Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet back at latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device MAC-Layer in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-906-xxx Broadcom Test Loop Failed 1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and make
Ethernet back at sure that the cable type and connection are
Device Physical correct.
Layer
2. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-907-xxx Broadcom Test LEDs Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 228.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

122 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Recovering from an IBM System x Server Firmware update failure
If power to the server is interrupted while you are updating the IBM System x
Server Firmware, the server might not restart correctly or might not display video. If
this happens, complete the following steps to recover:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
4. Locate JP6 on the system board and remove any adapters that impede access
to the jumpers.

5. Move jumper JP6 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI recovery mode.
6. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the side cover (see
“Installing the left-side cover” on page 145).
7. Reconnect all external cables and power cords.
8. Insert the update CD into the CD or DVD drive.
9. Turn on the server and the monitor.
After the update session is completed, remove the CD from the drive and turn
off the server.
10. Disconnect all power cords and external cables.
11. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page 144).
12. Remove any adapters that impede access to jumper JP6.
13. Move jumper JP6 to back to pins 1 and 2 for normal operation.
14. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the side cover (see
“Installing the left-side cover” on page 145).
15. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
16. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

The function of each switch and jumper on the system board is described in
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 16.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 123

Solving power problems
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page
125 for the minimum configuration).
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.

If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.

Solving Ethernet controller problems

The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.

Try the following procedures:

v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
– If the Ethernet controller is set to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check the LAN activity LEDs on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers
are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.

124 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.

If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.

Solving undetermined problems

If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use
the information in this section.

If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or

intermittent), see “Software problems” on page 70.

Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged IBM System x Server Firmware can
cause undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the password switch 2
(SW4) to override the power-on password and clear the CMOS memory; see
“Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers” on page 14.

Check the LEDs on all the power supplies (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 84).
If the LEDs indicate that the power supplies are working correctly, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-IBM devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM per
microprocessor (2 GB in a two-microprocessor configuration).

The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:

v One microprocessor
v One 1 GB DIMM
v One power supply
v Power cord
v ServeRAID SAS adapter
v System board assembly
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in
the following order:
a. Power supply
b. Power-supply cage
c. Memory
d. Microprocessor
e. System board

If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the
system board or extender card.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 125

 If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.

Problem determination tips

Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that you can
encounter, use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If
possible, have this information available when you request assistance from IBM.
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor and hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptoms
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v IBM System x Server Firmware level
v Operating-system type and version level

You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following factors
are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v IBM System x Server Firmware level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup

See Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 249 for
information about calling IBM for service.

126 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839
The following replaceable components are available for all models of the System
x3500 M2 Type 7839 server, except as specified otherwise in “Replaceable server
components” on page 128. For an updated parts listing on the Web, complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Parts documents lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3500 M2, and click Continue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 127

Replaceable server components
Replaceable components are of four types:
v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.
Table 8. Parts listing, Type 7839
CRU CRU
part number part number FRU
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) part number
1 Power supply, hot-swap 920 W 39Y7387
2 Filler, power supply 39Y7391
3 Operator information panel assembly, with bracket and 41Y9080
cables
4 Light path diagnostics panel with cable 46D1395
5 Half-high DVD-ROM drive 43W8466
6 Front bezel assembly 46D1392
7 5.25-inch EMC flange (part of miscellaneous EMC shields 46C6706
kit)
8 2.5-inch drive bay filler (part of miscellaneous EMC 46C6706
shields kit)
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 73 GB 10 krpm 43W7537
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 146 GB 10 krpm 42D0633
6 Gbps
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 300 GB 10 krpm 42D0638
6 Gbps
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 73 GB 15 krpm 6 42D0673
Gbps
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 146 GB 15 krpm 42D0678
6 Gbps
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 146 GB 10 krpm 43W7538
9 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap, 73 GB 15 krpm 43W7546
10 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage 46D1405
11 2.5-inch SAS hard disk drive backplane 43V7070
12 Fan-cage assembly 46D1384
13 Hot-swap fan, 120 mm 44E4563

128 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. Parts listing, Type 7839 (continued)
CRU CRU
part number part number FRU
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) part number
14 Adapter, ServeRAID-MR10i 43W4297
15 Adapter, ServeRAID-BR10i 44E8690
16 Adapter, ServeRAID-MR10is 44E8696
17 Left-side cover 46D1389
18 Air baffle 46D1409
19 Heat sink 46D1407
20 Microprocessor - 1.86 GHz/4M 80 W dual core (model 46D1272
12x)
20 Microprocessor - 2.00 GHz/4M 80 W quad core (model 46D1271
22x)
20 Microprocessor - 2.26 GHz/8M 80 W quad core (model 46D1267
32x)
20 Microprocessor - 2.40 GHz/8M 80 W quad core (model 46D1266
42x)
20 Microprocessor - 2.53 GHz/8M 80 W quad core (model 46D1265
52x)
21 Retention module, heat sink 46D1397
22 Memory, 1 GB single rank, PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 44T1480
22 Memory, 2 GB dual rank, PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 44T1481
22 Memory, 2 GB single rank, PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 44T1482
22 Memory, 4 GB dual rank, PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 44T1483
23 System board 46D1406
24 VRM, microprocessor 2 39Y7395
25 Power-supply cage assembly 39Y7389
Alcohol wipe 59P4739
Cable, operator information panel 46C6707
Cable, DVD signal, SATA 25R5635
Cable, DVD, power 46D1393
Cable, front panel USB 39Y9790
Cable, SAS backplane signal 46M6498
Cable, SAS backplane configuration 46D1401
Cable, SAS backplane power 46D1400
Chassis 46D1408
EMC shield kit, optional rack model 41Y9070
EMC shield kit, miscellaneous 46C6706
EMC shield, 4 x 3.5-inch 46D1402
Extender card, PCI Express 49Y4508
Extender card, PCI-X 49Y4509
Foot kit, stabilizer, front 26K7345
Foot kit, rear 13N2985

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839 129

Table 8. Parts listing, Type 7839 (continued)
CRU CRU
part number part number FRU
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) part number
Keyboard, 103P US English 42C0060
Keyboard, Japan 194 42C0081
Keylock assembly 26K7363
Mouse, USB optical 39Y9875
Planar tray 46D1390
Random lock assembly 26K7364
Redundant power and cooling kit (option) 44X0381
Slide assembly, optional rack model 40K6679
System service label 46C6705
Thermal grease 41Y9292

Consumable parts are not covered by the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty. The
following consumable parts are available for purchase from the retail store.
Table 9. Consumable parts, Type 7839
Index Description Part number
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
ServeRAID battery 43W4342

To order a consumable part, complete the following steps:

1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/.
2. From the Products menu, select Upgrades, accessories & parts.
3. Click Obtain maintenance parts; then, follow the instructions to order the part
from the retail store.

If you need help with your order, call the toll-free number that is listed on the retail
parts page, or contact your local IBM representative for assistance.

Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.

IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,

130 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.

IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.

IBM power cord part

number Used in these countries and regions
39M5206 China
39M5102 Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea
39M5123 Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria,
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape
Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo
(Democratic Republic of), Congo (Republic of), Cote D’Ivoire
(Ivory Coast), Croatia (Republic of), Czech Republic, Dahomey,
Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia, Ethiopia,
Finland, France, French Guyana, French Polynesia, Germany,
Greece, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos (People’s
Democratic Republic of), Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxembourg,
Macedonia (former Yugoslav Republic of), Madagascar, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Moldova (Republic of),
Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania,
Russian Federation, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Saudi
Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia (Republic of),
Somalia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Syrian Arab Republic,
Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine,
Upper Volta, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and Futuna,
Yugoslavia (Federal Republic of), Zaire
39M5130 Denmark
39M5144 Bangladesh, Lesotho, Macao, Maldives, Namibia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Uganda
39M5151 Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Channel
Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,
Ghana, Grenada, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent
and the Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sudan,
Tanzania (United Republic of), Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
39M5158 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
39M5165 Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
39M5172 Israel

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839 131

 IBM power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5095 220 - 240 V
Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Mexico, Micronesia (Federal States of),
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Taiwan, United States of America, Venezuela
39M5081 110 - 120 V
Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela
39M5219 Korea (Democratic People’s Republic of), Korea (Republic of)
39M5199 Japan
39M5068 Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
39M5226 India
39M5233 Brazil

132 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components
Replaceable components are of four types:
v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3500 M2 Type 7839,” on page 127 to
determine whether a component is a Tier 1 CRU, Tier 2 CRU, or FRU.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

Installation guidelines
Before you install optional devices, read the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the guidelines in
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 135. This information will help you
work safely.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is
near the server and that no tools or other objects have been left inside the
server.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up
with your leg muscles.
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 133

 v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to
perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.
v You can install a maximum of two IDE devices in the server.
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

System reliability guidelines

To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that the following
requirements are next:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v If the server has redundant power, each of the power-supply bays has a power
supply installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with
the server cover removed might damage server components.
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan as soon as possible.
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.
v You do not remove the air baffles or air ducts while the server is running.
Operating the server without the air baffle or air ducts might cause the
microprocessor to overheat.
v Microprocessor socket 2 always contains either a microprocessor baffle or a
microprocessor and heat sink.

Working inside the server with the power on

Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the
power on.

The server supports hot-plug, hot-add, and hot-swap devices and is designed to
operate safely while it is turned on and the cover is removed. Follow these
guidelines when you work inside a server that is turned on:
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts
before you work inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are you work
inside the server.
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.

134 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that might fall
into the server as you lean over it.
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,
into the server.

Handling static-sensitive devices

Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages
until you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the

following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available. Always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static
electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a
metal surface.
v Take additional care when you handle devices during cold weather. Heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

Returning a device or component

If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow the packaging
instructions provided with the replacement part. Use any packaging materials for
shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 135

Internal cable routing and connectors
You can install either a USB or SATA tape drive in the server. The following
illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors for both the USB tape
drive and the SATA tape drive. It also shows the internal power cable for the optical
drives.
USB signal
Optical drive
cable connector
power cable
connector USB signal Optical drive
cable power cable

SATA optical
drive signal cable

The following illustrations show the cabling information for installing the SATA to
traditional power converter cable when you install an RDX internal USB tape drive
in the server. This cable comes with the server in the plastic bag with the drive rails.
Power
converter Connects to
cable tape drive

Connects to
optical power cable

136 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Optical power cable
SATA connector

Power converter
cable

Tape drive

The following illustration shows the cable connectors on the ServeRAID-BR10i

controller.
ServeRAID-BR10i
controller 0
1

Cable connector
for drives 0 - 3 and 9 - 12
Cable connector
for drives 4 - 7

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 137

 The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID BR10i controller to eight 2.5-inch hard disk drives. The left port
on the ServeRAID BR10i controller is connected to the backplane for drives 4 - 7
and the right port on the adapter is connected to the backplane for drives 0 - 3.

The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID BR10i controller to sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives.

138 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the cable connectors on the ServeRAID-MR10i
controller.

The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID MR10i or ServeRAID MR10is controllers to eight 2.5-inch hard
disk drives. The right port on the ServeRAID MR10i or ServeRAID MR10is
controller is connected to the backplane for drives 4 - 7 and the left port on the
controller is connected to the backplane for drives 0 - 3.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 139

 The following illustration shows the internal SAS power cable routing from eight
hard disk drives to the connectors on the system board.

The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing from eight
hard disk drives to the connectors on the system board. The cables are labeled 0
and 1 to guide you to the correct backplane connectors. The cable labeled 0
connects to backplane A0 and the cable labeled 1 connects to backplane A1.

140 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the internal SAS power cable routing from sixteen
hard disk drives to the connectors on the system board.

The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing from sixteen
hard disk drives to the connectors on the system board. The cables are labeled 0
and 1 to guide you to the correct backplane connectors. The cable labeled 0
connects to backplane A0 and the cable labeled 1 connects to backplane A1.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 141

 The following illustration shows the internal SATA and power cable routing and the
connectors from the DVD drive to the system board.

142 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors from the
operator information panel to the system board.

The following illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors from the
light path diagnostics LED panel to the system board.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 143

Removing the left-side cover

To remove the left-side cover complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. If you are installing or replacing a non-hot-swap component, turn off the server
and all peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external
cables.
3. Unlock the left-side cover, using the key that comes with the server.
4. Pull the cover-release latch down while you rotate the top edge of the cover
away from the server; then, lift the cover off the server.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before you turn
on the server. Operating the server for more than 2 minutes with the cover
removed might damage server components.

144 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the left-side cover

To install the left-side cover, complete the following steps:

1. Set the bottom edge of the left-side cover on the bottom ledge of the server.
2. Rotate the top edge of the cover toward the server and press inward on the
cover until it clicks into place.
3. Lock the cover, using the key that comes with the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 145

Opening the bezel

To open the bezel, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Unlock the left-side side cover, using the key that comes with the server.

Note: You must unlock the side cover to open the bezel.
3. Position your finger on the depressed area on the left side of the bezel and
rotate the bezel away from the server.

146 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Closing the bezel

To close the bezel, complete the following steps:

1. Rotate the left side of the bezel toward the server to the closed position.
2. Lock the left-side cover, using the key that comes with the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 147

Opening the bezel media door
To open the media door, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Unlock the side cover.

Note: You must unlock the side cover to open or remove the bezel. When you
lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Grasp the depressed area on the left side of the bezel door and rotate the bezel
to the open position.
4. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab up to unlock
the bezel media door; then, grasp the depressed area on the left side of the
media door and pull the door open.

5. When the media door is unlocked, the icon on the side of the bezel will be in
the unlocked position.

Media door icon

148 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Closing the bezel media door
To close the media door, complete the following steps:
1. Swing the bezel media door closed and push it into the bezel to close it.
2. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab down to lock
the bezel media door.

3. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 149

Opening the power-supply cage

Opening the power-supply cage allows access to the air baffle, microprocessors,
and DIMMs. To open the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii, and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies and power-supply fillers,
if any are installed (see “Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Pull up on the power-supply cage handle to unlock the cage; then, rotate the
cage out until it stops. The tab on the rear power-supply latch bracket clicks into
place when the cage is completely out of the way.
6. Let the power-supply cage rest on the rear power-supply latch bracket.

150 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Closing the power-supply cage
To return the power-supply cage to its closed position, complete the following steps:
1. Rotate the power-supply cage back slightly; then, push down on the release tab
on the rear power-supply support bracket.

Power supply
support bracket

Power supply
release tab

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 151

 2. Rotate the power-supply cage into the server chassis. The locating tabs on the
power-supply cage must fit over the corresponding tabs on the front latch
bracket.
Attention: Do not allow the power-supply cage cables to be caught or
pinched while you rotate the power-supply cage into the chassis.
Power-supply cage
front latch bracket
Power-supply cage
Power-supply
Locating tabs
cage handle

Notch

Locating tabs

3. Rotate the power-supply cage handle down until the handle tip engages the
notch in the front latch bracket; then, lower the handle until it locks in place.
4. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
5. Install the hot-swap power supplies or power-supply filler (see “Installing a
hot-swap power supply” on page 160).
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

152 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Turning the stabilizing feet

To rotate the front feet, complete the following steps:

1. Carefully position the server on a flat surface, with the feet hanging over the
edge of the flat surface to ease removal.
2. Press in on the clips that hold the feet in place; then, pry the feet away from the
server. In some cases, you might need a screwdriver to press in on the clips.

Feet

3. Reinstall the feet in the opposite location, with the tab on the feet extending
beyond the edge of the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 153

Tier 1 CRU information
Installation of Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your
request, you will be charged for the installation.

Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive

To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
3. Press down on the release latch to open the drive handle; then, pull the drive
out of the drive bay.
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

154 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
The following notes describe the types of hard disk drives that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a hard disk drive:
v Depending on the model, the server supports up to eight or up to sixteen
2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays.
v The hot-swap bays are arranged horizontally in the top and bottom hard disk
drive cages:
– On models with eight hard disk drives, the top bays are numbered 0 through 7
(from right to left)
– On models with 16 hard disk drives, the top bays are numbered 0 through 7
(from right to left), and the bottom bays are numbered 8 through 15 (from right
to left)

Bay 4 Bay 0
Bay 5 Bay 1
Bay 6 Bay 2
Bay 7 Bay 3

Bay 12 Bay 8
Bay 13 Bay 9
Bay 14 Bay 10
Bay 15 Bay 11

v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Inspect the drive and drive bay for signs of damage.
v Make sure that the drive is correctly installed in the drive bay.
v See the documentation for the ServeRAID controller for instructions for installing
a hard disk drive.
v All hot-swap drives in the server must have the same throughput speed rating;
using drives with different speed ratings might cause all drives to operate at the
speed of the slowest drive.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays. However, you must turn off the server when you perform any steps
that involve installing or removing cables.
v The drive ID of each hot-swap hard disk drive is printed above the drive bay.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 155

 To install a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the disk drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the disk drive from the package.
3. Remove the filler panel from the hot-swap drive bay, if one is installed.
4. Make sure that the tray handle is open; then, install the hard disk drive into the
hot-swap bay.
5. Rotate the drive handle down until the drive is seated in the hot-swap bay and
the release latch clicks into place.
Notes:
a. After you install the hard disk drive, check the disk drive status LEDs to
verify that the hard disk drive is operating correctly.
If the amber hard disk drive status LED is lit continuously, that drive is faulty
and must be replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing,
the drive is being accessed.
b. If the server is configured for RAID operation through an optional
ServeRAID adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you
install hard disk drives. See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM
ServeRAID Support CD for additional information about RAID operation and
complete instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.
6. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).

156 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan-support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to remove
any hot-swap fan in the server.

To remove a hot-swap fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not leave the top cover off the
server for more than 2 minutes.
3. Open the fan-locking handle by sliding the orange release latch in the direction
of the arrow.
4. Pull outward on the free end of the handle to remove the fan from the server.
5. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap fan, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 157

Installing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to install
any hot-swap fan in the server.

To install a hot-swap fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap fan to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the fan from the package.
3. Open the fan-locking handle on the replacement fan.
4. Insert the fan into the socket and close the handle to the locked position.
5. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).

158 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a hot-swap power supply
If you install or remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.

Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, you must turn off
the server before removing the power supply.

To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the connector on the back of the power supply
that you are removing.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 159

 3. Press the release latch on the power supply and pull the power supply out of
the power-supply cage.
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap power supply, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a hot-swap power supply

If you install or remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.

Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.

160 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power supply to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply from the
package.
3. Remove the power-supply filler panel from the power bay, if one is installed.
4. Place the power supply into the power-supply cage and push it in until it locks
into place.

Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, a

power-supply filler must be installed in the empty power bay.
5. Connect one end of the power cord for the new power supply into the connector
on the back of the power supply; then, connect the other end of the power cord
to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Note: If the server has been turned off, you must wait approximately 3 minutes
after you connect the server power cord to an electrical outlet before the
power-control button becomes active.
6. Make sure that the ac power LED on the top of the power supply is lit,
indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. If the server is turned on,
make sure that the dc power LED on the top of the power supply is lit also.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 161

Removing the battery

To remove the battery, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
6. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to tilt the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it
away from the socket.
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket.

7. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations (see the

Environmental Notices and User Guide for more information).

162 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the battery
The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace
the battery in the server:
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the
same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the
system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.

Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

To install the replacement battery, complete the following steps:

1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the replacement battery:
a. Hold the battery in a vertical orientation so that the smaller side is facing the
socket.
b. Tilt the battery and slide the battery into its socket; then, press the battery
toward the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip
holds the battery securely.
3. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
4. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 163

 Note: You must wait approximately 3 minutes after you connect the server
power cord to an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes
active.
5. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration:
v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
See “Starting the Setup utility” on page 229 for details.

164 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the DVD drive

To remove the DVD drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
4. Disconnect the DVD drive cables from the back of the DVD drive.
5. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
6. Grasp the blue tabs on each side of the DVD drive and press them inward while
you pull the drive out of the sever.
7. Remove the blue rails from the DVD drive and save them for future use.
8. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 165

Installing the DVD drive

To install the DVD drive, complete the following steps:

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DVD drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the DVD drive from the
package.
2. Install the blue rails on the DVD drive, using the holes nearest the center of the
drive.
3. Align the rails on the DVD drive with the guides in the drive bay; then, slide the
DVD drive into the drive bay until the rails click into place.
4. Connect the power and signal cables to the back of the DVD drive (see “Internal
cable routing and connectors” on page 136).
5. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).
6. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

166 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the air baffle
To remove the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii, and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle:
a. Lift the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle up as shown in the illustration.
b. Press the air baffle pinch tab.
c. Lift the air baffle up and remove it from the server.

8. If you are instructed to return the air baffle, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 167

Installing the air baffle

To install the air baffle, complete the following steps:

1. With the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle lifted up, align the positioning pins on
the ends of the air baffle with the locating holes in the server chassis and
fan-cage assembly.
2. Slide the air baffle down into the server until the positioning pins fit into the
locating holes; then, press down on the air baffle until the pinch tab clicks into
place.
3. Rotate the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle down to the system board.

Note: Make sure that the power-supply cage cables are not caught under the
air baffle.
4. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
5. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
6. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

168 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a voltage regulator module

Microprocessor 2
VRM

Heat sink 2

VRM connector

To remove a voltage regulator module (VRM), complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see “Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Locate the voltage regulator module next to microprocessor 2.
9. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
10. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the VRM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 169

Installing a voltage regulator module

Microprocessor 2
VRM

Heat sink 2

VRM connector

To install a voltage regulator module, complete the following steps:

1. Locate the VRM connector on the system board, next to the heat sink for
microprocessor 2 (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14).
2. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
3. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
4. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with the
slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight down into
the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM simultaneously.
The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the VRM is seated in the
connector.
5. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
6. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
7. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
8. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

170 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the rear adapter-retention bracket

Hinge pin

Rear adapter
retention bracket

To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
4. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on a static-protective surface (see
“Removing an adapter” on page 198).

Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
5. Open the rear adapter-retention bracket.
6. Press the rear adapter-retention bracket and release the top hinge point; then,
release the other hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.
7. If you are instructed to return the rear adapter-retention bracket, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 171

Installing the rear adapter-retention bracket

To install the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:

1. Insert the bottom hinge point on the rear adapter-retention bracket into the
matching hole in the chassis; then, insert the top hinge point into the matching
hole.
2. Install the adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 199).
3. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
4. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page 145).
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

172 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket
To remove the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
4. Open the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.
5. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on a static-protective surface (see
“Removing an adapter” on page 198).

Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
6. Lift the top of the front adapter-retainer bracket and release the hinge point;
then, remove the bottom hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.
7. If you are instructed to return the front adapter-retention bracket, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Installing the front adapter-retention bracket

To install the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Insert one hole on the front adapter-retention bracket into the hinge point.
2. Position the other hole and insert the adapter-retention bracket into the hinge
point.
3. Install the adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 199).
4. Close the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.
5. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page 145).
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 173

Tier 2 CRU information
You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for your server.

Removing a memory module

DIMM

Retaining
clip

To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see “Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board (see “System-board internal
connectors” on page 14).
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, handle the clips gently.
9. Move the DIMM retaining clips on the side of the DIMM connector to the open
position by pressing the retaining clips away from the center of the DIMM
connector.
10. Using your fingers, lift the DIMM out of the DIMM connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

174 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing memory
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that
your server supports and other information that you must consider when you install
DIMMs.
v The server supports industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 800, 1066, or
1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999 (single-, dual-, or quad-rank), registered,
synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory
modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC). See http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported memory modules
for the server.
v At least one DIMM must be installed for each installed microprocessor for the
server to operate, but three DIMMs per microprocessor improves server
performance.
v When two microprocessors are installed in the server, distribute the DIMMs
between the two microprocessors to improve server performance.
v The server supports a maximum of 16 single-, dual-, or quad-rank DIMMs. The
maximum number of quad-rank DIMMs the server supports is 12.
v The memory controller has three registered DIMM channels per microprocessor
(Channels 0, 1, and 2). Channels 0 and 1 support three DIMMS and Channel 2
supports two DIMMs.
v Install DIMMs starting with the connector farthest from the microprocessor within
each channel.
v When you install a quad-ranked DIMM in a channel with single- or dual-ranked
DIMMs, install the quad-ranked DIMM in the connector farthest from the
microprocessor.
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM
in the server.
v The server can operate in two major modes: mirroring and independent channel
modes.
v The server supports 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB (when available) DIMMs, with
a minimum of 2 GB and a maximum of 64 GB of system memory (128 GB when
8 GB DIMMs are available).

For 32-bit operating systems only: Some memory is reserved for various
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of
memory that is reserved for system resources depends on the operating system,
the configuration of the server, and the configured PCI devices.

Independent channel mode

The server requires at least one installed DIMM per microprocessor. The server
comes with a minimum of two 1 GB DIMMs, installed in connectors 3 and 6.
(Connectors 3 and 6 are the farthest connectors from the microprocessor 1 for
channels 0 and 1.) When you install additional DIMMs, install them in the order
shown in Table 10, to maintain server performance.

Note: If you have configured the server to use memory mirroring, do not use the
order shown in this table; use the installation order that is shown in Table 12 on
page 177.
Table 10. DIMM installation sequence for independent channel mode
Installed microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
Microprocessor 1 3, 6, 8, 2, 5, 7, 1, 4

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 175

 Table 10. DIMM installation sequence for independent channel mode (continued)
Installed microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
Microprocessor 2 11, 14, 16, 10, 13, 15, 9, 12

Memory mirroring mode

Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs within
two channels simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller switches
from the primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of DIMMs. You must
enable memory mirroring through the Setup utility. For details about enabling
memory mirroring, see “Starting the Setup utility” on page 229. When you use the
memory-mirroring feature, consider the following information:
v When you use memory mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a time.
One DIMM must be in channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in the same
connector in channel 1. The two DIMMs in each pair must be identical in size,
type, rank (single, dual, or quad), and organization. They do not have to be
identical in speed. The channels run at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of
the channels. See Table 12 on page 177 for the DIMM connectors that are in
each pair.
v Channel 2, DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring
mode.
v The maximum amount of available memory is reduced to half of the amount of
installed memory when memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install
64 GB of memory, only 32 GB of addressable memory is available when you use
memory mirroring.

The following illustration shows the memory channel interface layout with the DIMM
installation sequence for memory mirroring mode. The numbers within the boxes
indicate the DIMM population sequence in pairs within the channels, and the
numbers next to the boxes indicate the DIMM connectors within the channels. For
example, the following illustration shows that the first pair of DIMMs (indicated by 1s
inside the boxes) should be installed in DIMM connector 3 on channel 0 and DIMM
connector 6 on channel 1. DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 on channel 2 are not
used in memory-mirroring mode.

Figure 1. Memory channel interface layout

176 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following table lists the DIMM connectors on each memory channel.
Table 11. Connectors on each memory channel
Memory channel DIMM connectors
Channel 0 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 11
Channel 1 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14
Channel 2 (not used in memory mirroring) 7, 8, 15, 16

The following illustration shows the memory connector layout that is associated with
each microprocessor. For example, DIMM connectors 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and
16 (DIMM connectors are shown underneath the boxes) are associated with
microprocessor 2 socket (CPU2), and DIMM connectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8
are associated with microprocessor 1 socket (CPU1). The numbers within the boxes
indicate the installation sequence of the DIMM pairs. For example, the first DIMM
pair (indicated within the boxes by 1s) should be installed in DIMM connectors 3
and 6, which are associated with microprocessor 1 (CPU1).

Note: You can install DIMMs for microprocessor 2 as soon as you install
microprocessor 2; you do not have to wait until all of the DIMM connectors for
microprocessor 1 are filled.

Figure 2. DIMM connectors associated with each microprocessor

The following table lists the installation sequence for installing DIMMs in
memory-mirroring mode.
Table 12. DIMM installation sequence for memory-mirroring mode
Number of installed
DIMMs microprocessors DIMM connector
First pair of DIMMs 1 3, 6
Second pair of DIMMs 1 2, 5
Third pair of DIMMs 1 1, 4
Fourth pair of DIMMs 2 14, 11
Fifth pair of DIMMs 2 13, 10
Sixth pair of DIMMs 2 12, 9
Note: DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring mode.

When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information changes.
When you restart the server, the system displays a message that indicates that the
memory configuration has changed.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 177

 Installing a memory module

To install a memory module, complete the following steps:

1. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board (see “System-board internal
connectors” on page 14). Determine the connectors into which you will install
the DIMMs.
2. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
3. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
4. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.

178 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 5. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector.

6. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure
on both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the
locked position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.

Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM,
and then reinsert it.
7. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
9. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 179

Removing the bezel

To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Unlock the left-side cover.

Note: You must unlock the side cover to remove the bezel.
3. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
4. Press the retention tabs on each hinge assembly toward each other and pull the
hinge assemblies out of the chassis.

Note: You might need a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the hinge assemblies out
of the chassis.

180 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Retention tabs

Note: The bezel also disengages from the chassis hinges if you rotate the
bezel beyond 180° or if excessive pressure is applied to the bezel. Do not be
alarmed, because this is how the bezel was designed. The bezel is designed
with breakaway hinges so that you can easily reattach it to the chassis.
5. If you are instructed to return the bezel, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 181

Installing the bezel

To install the bezel, complete the following steps:

1. Align the hinge assemblies with the hinge holes on the chassis.
2. Push the hinges into the holes on the chassis until they snap into place.
3. If you removed the bezel by detaching the sliding hinge mount from the hinge
assembly (using the breakaway method as the bezel was designed for),
complete the following steps to reattach the bezel:
a. Press in on the rear of the sliding hinge mount until it extends beyond the
edge of the bezel, and hold it in place.

182 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Sliding hinge mount

Hinge assembly Hinge pin

b. Align the sliding hinge mount with the hinge pin on the hinge assembly on
the chassis.
c. Press the sliding hinge mount against the hinge pin until the sliding hinge
mount snaps onto the hinge pin.
4. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).
5. Lock the left-side cover.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 183

Removing the fan-cage assembly

To remove the fan-cage assembly, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see “Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. If any full-length PCI adapters are installed, remove them (see “Removing an
adapter” on page 198).
8. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
9. Press the fan cage release latches on each side of the fan cage toward the
sides of the server. The fan cage will lift up slightly when the release latches
are fully open.
10. Grasp the fan-cage assembly and lift it out of the server.
11. If you are instructed to return the fan-cage assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

184 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the fan-cage assembly

To install the fan-cage assembly, complete the following steps.

Attention: Make sure that all wires and cables inside the server are routed
correctly before you install the fan-cage assembly. Wiring that is not properly routed
might be damaged or might prevent the fan-cage assembly from seating properly in
the server.
1. Align the guides on the fan cage with release latches on each side.
2. Push the fan-cage assembly into the server until both release buttons click into
place.

Note: Make sure that the fan cage is fully seated in the server and that both of
the release buttons click into place.
3. If you removed any full-length PCI adapters, install them (see “Installing an
adapter” on page 199).
4. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
6. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 185

Removing an optional tape drive

To remove an optional full-high tape drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
4. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
5. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the back of the tape drive.
6. Grasp the blue tabs on each side of the tape drive and press them inward while
you pull the drive out of the sever.
7. Note the location of the blue rails on the tape drive; then, remove the blue rails
and save them for future use.
8. Gently pull the tape drive out of the server.
9. If you are instructed to return the tape drive, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

186 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing an optional tape drive

To install an optional full-height tape drive, complete the following steps:

1. Remove the EMC shields from the drive bay, if any are installed.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the tape drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the tape drive from the
package.
3. Install the blue rails on the tape drive.
4. Align the rails on the tape drive with the guides in the drive bay; then, slide the
tape drive into the drive bay until the rails click into place.
5. Connect one of the connectors on the optical drive power cable to the tape
drive. If however, you are installing an RDX internal USB tape drive, you will
need to install the SATA to traditional power converter cable. Locate the SATA to
traditional power converter cable that came with the server in the plastic bag
with the drive rails; then connect one end of the converter cable to the third
connector (the default connector) on the optical drive power cable and connect
the other end of the cable to the tape drive as shown in the following
illustrations.
Power
converter Connects to
cable tape drive

Connects to
optical power cable

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 187

 Optical power cable
SATA connector

Power converter
cable

Tape drive

6. Connect one end of the tape drive signal cable to the tape drive and the other
end to the connector on the system board. Route the cable through the plastic
slots on the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly as shown
in the following illustration:
USB signal
Optical drive
cable connector
power cable
connector USB signal Optical drive
cable power cable

SATA optical
drive signal cable

7. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).

8. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).

188 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 189

Removing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly

To remove the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly from the server,
complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices; then, disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Carefully lay the server down on its side.
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
8. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
9. Remove the fan-cage assembly (see “Removing the fan-cage assembly” on
page 184).
10. Disconnect the light path diagnostics cable from the system board (see
“System-board internal connectors” on page 14 and “Internal cable routing and
connectors” on page 136).
11. Stand the server back up in its vertical position.
12. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
13. Press down on the release latch on the top of the USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly mounting bracket; then, rotate the top of the mounting
bracket away from the server.
14. Lift the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting bracket out
and away from the server while you pull the diagnostics cable through the
hole.
15. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB cable and light path diagnostics
assembly:
a. Rotate the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting
bracket so that you are looking at the rear of the bracket.

190 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
pull the USB cable away from the mounting bracket.
16. If you are instructed to return the USB cable and light path diagnostics
assembly, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials
for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 191

Installing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly

To install the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly, complete the following
steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then,
remove the assembly from the package.
2. Connect the USB cable to the replacement USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly:
a. Rotate the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting
bracket so that you are looking at the rear of the bracket.
b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
align the key on the cable connector with the notch on the mounting
bracket.
c. Insert the connector into the mounting bracket; then, release the retaining
clips.
3. Feed the light path diagnostics cable into the server through the opening in the
front of the server.
4. Position the bottom of the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
mounting bracket into the opening and rotate the top of the bracket toward the
server until it clicks into place.
5. Connect the light path diagnostics cable to the system board. See
“System-board internal connectors” on page 14 and“Internal cable routing and
connectors” on page 136 to locate the USB and light path diagnostics
connectors on the system board.
6. Install the fan-cage assembly (see “Installing the fan-cage assembly” on page
185).
7. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
9. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
10. Install the bezel (see “Installing the bezel” on page 182).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).

192 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 193

Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane

To remove a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
4. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
5. Remove the hot-swap hard disk drives (see “Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap
hard disk drive” on page 154).
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
8. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
9. Remove the fan-cage assembly (see “Removing the fan-cage assembly” on
page 184).
10. Note where the power, signal, and configuration cables are connected to the
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane; then, disconnect them (see “2.5-inch hard
disk drive backplane connectors” on page 19).
11. Lift the retention latch that holds the backplane in place; then, grasp the top
edge of the backplane and rotate it toward the rear of the server. When the
backplane is clear of the drive-cage retention tabs, remove it from the server.
12. If you are removing another SAS backplanes, repeat steps 10 and 11 to
remove the remaining backplane.
13. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

194 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane

To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hard disk drive backplane
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the backplane
from the package.
2. Position the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane in the drive-cage retention tabs;
then, rotate the top of the backplane toward the locator pins until the latch
clicks into place
3. Connect the power, signal, and configuration cables to the 2.5-inch hard disk
drive backplane (see “2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane connectors” on page
19 and “Internal cable routing and connectors” on page 136).
4. If you are replacing another 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, repeat steps 1
through 3 to install the additional backplane.
5. Install the hot-swap hard disk drives (see “Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard
disk drive” on page 155).
6. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).
7. Install the fan-cage assembly (see “Installing the fan-cage assembly” on page
185).
8. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
9. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
10. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 195

Removing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage

To remove the 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the fan-cage assembly (see “Removing the fan-cage assembly” on
page 184).
9. Turn the server upright and open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page
146).
10. Remove all of the disk drives from the 2.5-inch disk drive cage (see “Removing
a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 154).
11. Disconnect the cables from the 2.5-inch disk drive backplane.
12. Press both drive cage release latches inward; then, pull the drive cage out of
the front of server.
13. Remove both of the backplanes from the 2.5-inch disk drive cage (see
“Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane” on page 194).
14. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch disk drive cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

196 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage

To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive cage
from the package.
2. Install both 2.5-inch disk drive backplanes in the back of the drive cage (see
“Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane” on page 195).
3. Slide the 2.5-inch disk drive cage into the opening in the front of the server;
then, press drive cage in until the release latches click into place.
4. Install any hot-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the drive cage
(see “Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 155).
5. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).
6. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
7. Connect the cables to the 2.5-inch disk drive backplane (see “2.5-inch hard
disk drive backplane connectors” on page 19 and “Internal cable routing and
connectors” on page 136).
8. Install the fan-cage assembly (see “Installing the fan-cage assembly” on page
185).
9. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
10. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
11. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
12. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 197

Removing and replacing FRUs
FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from the hardware.

Removing an adapter

To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Rotate the adapter retention brackets to the open position.
6. Disconnect the cables from the adapter.
7. Remove the screw that secures the adapter to the server chassis.
8. Pull the adapter out of the adapter connector; then, lift the adapter out of the
server.
9. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

198 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing an adapter
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter:
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section. If you must change the
switch or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that come with
the adapter.
v Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the adapter.
v PCI slots 1 and 6 support half-length PCI adapters only.
v PCI slots 2, 3, 4, and 5 support both half-length and full-length PCI adapters.
v The PCI Express extender card supports a full-length adapter.
v The PCI-X extender card supports two full-length adapters.
v PCI slots 1 and 5 support the RAID adapters.
v PCI slot 2 supports a VGA adapter.
v The PCI configuration:
– Slot 1 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant.
– Slot 2 is a PCI Express x16 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant.
– Slots 3 and 4 are PCI Express x8 slots with x4 links, PCI Express 1.0a
compliant.
– Slot 5 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant
– Slot 6 is a PCI 33/32 slot, PCI 2.2 compliant.
– PCI Express extender card slot 7 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x4 links, PCI
Express 1.0a compliant.
– PCI-X extender card slots 7 and 8 are a PCI-X slots with 64/32 bits,
133/100/66 MHz from PXH.
v The system scans PCI slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources. The system
then starts (boots) the system devices in the following order, if you have not
changed the default boot precedence: integrated Ethernet controller, ServeRAID
controller, and then PCI, PCI-X, and PCI Express slots.

Note: To change the boot precedence for PCI and PCI-X devices, start the
Setup utility and select Start Options from the main menu. See “Starting the
Setup utility” on page 229 for details about using the Setup utility.
v The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters so that
you can install PCI adapters that do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.

Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when

the server is powered-on might cause the server to stop, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the
power on.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 199

 To install an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. See the documentation that comes with the adapter for any cabling instructions
and information about jumper or switch settings. (It might be easier for you to
route cables before you install the adapter.)
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the adapter to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the adapter from the package.
3. Determine the expansion-slot into which you will install the adapter.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover, if one is installed.
5. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if any)
from the end of the adapter. Otherwise, continue with the next step.

Adapter guide

6. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.

200 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or
the adapter.
7. Install the screw that secures the adapter to the server chassis.
8. Connect the adapter cables (see “Internal cable routing and connectors” on
page 136).
9. Rotate the adapter retention bracket to the closed position.
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation through an optional

ServeRAID adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you
install an adapter. See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM ServeRAID
Support CD for additional information about RAID operation and complete
instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 201

Removing the operator information panel assembly

To remove the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
4. Open the bezel (see “Opening the bezel” on page 146).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the fan-cage assembly (see “Removing the fan-cage assembly” on
page 184).
9. Disconnect the operator information panel assembly cable from the system
board (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14).
10. Locate the operator information panel assembly release latch just above the
DVD drive.
11. Push up on the release latch while you pull the operator information panel
assembly toward the rear of the server; then, angle the back of the assembly
toward the system board and remove the assembly from the server.
12. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that
are supplied to you.

202 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the operator information panel assembly

To install the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the operator information
panel assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove
the assembly from the package.
2. Angle the operator information panel assembly so that the edge of the
assembly is in the guide slot.
3. Slide the operator information panel assembly forward until the release latch
clicks into place.
4. Connect the operator information panel assembly cable to the system board
(see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14 and “Internal cable routing
and connectors” on page 136).
5. Install the fan-cage assembly (see “Installing the fan-cage assembly” on page
185).
6. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
7. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
8. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 160).
9. Close the bezel (see “Closing the bezel” on page 147).
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 203

Removing the power-supply cage

To remove the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).

204 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 8. Remove the power cable shield:
a. Note how the power-supply cage cables are routed behind the power cable
shield.
b. Press down on the power cable shield retention latch.
c. Slide the power cable shield toward the front of the server to disengage the
locating tabs; then, remove the power cable shield.

9. Disconnect the power-supply cage cables from the system board.

10. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
11. Remove the three screws on the rear of the server that secure the cage to the
server chassis; then, remove the cage from the server.
12. If you are instructed to return the power-supply cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 205

Installing the power-supply cage

To install the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power-supply cage to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power-supply cage
from the package.
2. Position the hinge so that the power-supply cage would be in the open position
if it were installed in the server.
3. Move the hinge inside the server chassis and align the screw holes with the
holes in the chassis.
4. Secure the power-supply cage to the chassis, using three screws.

206 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
5. Connect the power-supply cage cables and install the power cable shield:
a. Route the system power and ADV power cables behind the power cable
shield as shown in the illustration; then, connect the cables to the system
board (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14).

b. Place the power cable shield over the power cables and align the locating
tabs on the cable shield with the corresponding slots in the server chassis.
c. Press down on the power cable shield and slide it toward the rear of the
server until it clicks into place.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 207

 d. Route the CPU power and PSU control cables through the cable tie on the
rear of server chassis; then, connect the cables to the system board (see
“System-board internal connectors” on page 14)
6. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
7. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
8. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
9. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

208 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing an extender card

Extender card
retaining screws

To remove an extender card, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
5. Remove any adapters that are installed in the expansion slots (see “Removing
an adapter” on page 198).
6. Remove the system board and place it on a static-protective surface (see
“Removing the system board” on page 223).

Note: Do not remove the DIMMs, heat sinks, microprocessors, VRM, or battery
from the system board.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 209

 7. Remove the two screws that secure the extender card to the system-board tray.
8. Pull the extender card out of the system-board connector.
9. If you are instructed to return the extender card, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

210 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing an extender card

Extender card
retaining screws

To install an extender card, complete the following steps:

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the extender card to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the extender card from the
package.
2. Align the extender card with its connector on the system board; then, slide the
extender card into the connector.
3. Install the two screws that secure the extender card to the system-board tray.
4. Install the system board in the server (see “Installing the system board” on page
224).
5. Install any adapters that you removed from the expansion slots (see “Installing
an adapter” on page 199).
6. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 211

Removing a microprocessor and heat sink
To remove a microprocessor, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on
page 144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the microprocessor heat sink:
a. Lift the heat-sink release lever to the fully open position.
b. Rotate the back of the heat sink out of the retention bracket and remove
the heat sink from the server.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat
sink. Touching the thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease
on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, you must
replace it. See “Thermal grease” on page 218 for more information.

9. Lift the microprocessor-release latch to the fully open position (approximately

135° angle); then, lift the bracket frame and remove the microprocessor from
the socket.

212 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 10. If you are removing microprocessor 2, remove the voltage regulator module
(VRM) from the connector next to microprocessor socket 2.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a microprocessor and heat sink

The following notes describe the types of microprocessor that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a microprocessor:
v The server supports certain Intel Xeon scalable multi-core microprocessors,
which are designed for the LGA 1366 socket. These microprocessors are 64-bit
dual-core or quad-core microprocessors with an integrated memory controller,
quick-path interconnect, and shared last cache. See http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported microprocessors.
v The server supports up to two microprocessors. If the server comes with one
microprocessor, you can install a second microprocessor.
v Both microprocessors must have the same QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link
speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power segment,
cache size, and type.
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to determine
whether you must update the server firmware. To download the most current
level of server firmware and many other code updates for your server, complete
the following steps:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3500 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
v (Optional) Obtain an SMP-capable operating system. For a list of supported
operating systems and optional devices, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
serverproven/compat/us/.
v To order additional microprocessor optional devices, contact your IBM marketing
representative or authorized reseller.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 213

 v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you
do not have to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.
v The heat-sink FRU is packaged with the thermal grease applied to the underside:
– If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner)
is removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom
of the heat sink or set down the heat sink.
– You must replace the thermal grease if it becomes contaminated or has come
in contact with another object other than its paired microprocessor.
– The thermal grease is available as a separate FRU.
v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board to install the
second microprocessor.
v Some models support dual-core processors and quad-core processors. Do not
use dual-core processors and quad-core processors in the same server. Install all
dual-core or all quad-core processors in the server.

To install a microprocessor, complete the following steps:

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor from
the package.
2. Open the microprocessor socket by pressing down on the end of the release
lever, moving it to the side, and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.

214 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Open the microprocessor bracket frame and remove the microprocessor filler,
if one is installed.
Attention:
a. Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
b. Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during
installation or removal can damage the contacts.
c. Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.
d. Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented, aligned, and positioned in
the socket before you try to close the lever.
4. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor
from the package.
b. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if any is present.
c. Align the microprocessor with the socket. The microprocessor has two
notches that are keyed to two tabs on the sides of the socket. A
triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor points to a
45-degree angle on one corner of the socket.
d. Carefully place the microprocessor into the socket. Do not use excessive
force when you press the microprocessor into the socket.

Note: The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.

5. Close the microprocessor bracket frame and hold it down; then, close the
microprocessor retention latch and lock it securely in place.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 215

 6. Install a heat sink on the microprocessor.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or
set down the heat sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the
thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease is contaminated, call
IBM service to request a replacement thermal grease kit. For information about
installing the replacement thermal grease, see “Thermal grease” on page 218.

a. Make sure that the heat-sink release lever is in the fully open position.
b. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink, if one
is installed.
c. Position the heat sink above the microprocessor with the thermal-grease
side down.

216 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Attention: The heat sink is keyed to the retention module. Make sure
that the notch on the heat sink fits over the alignment tab on the retention
module.
d. Align the notch on the heat sink with the alignment tab on the retainer
module.
e. Slide the rear flange of the heat sink into the opening in the retainer
bracket.
f. Press down firmly on the front of the heat sink until it is seated securely.
g. Rotate the heat-sink release lever to the closed position and hook it
underneath the locking tab.
7. If you are installing microprocessor 2, install a VRM in the connector next to
microprocessor socket 2 (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14
for the VRM connector location).

Note: A VRM must be installed for microprocessor 2. The server will not start
if microprocessor 2 is installed without a VRM.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
c. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with
the slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight
down into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the
VRM is seated in the connector.
8. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
9. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
10. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 217

 Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.

To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and

heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.

Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.

4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.
0.02 mL of thermal
grease

Microprocessor

5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL

each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge. This is to ensure uniform distribution.

Note: 0.01 mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied,
approximately half (0.22 mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on page 213.

218 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a heat-sink retention module
Alignment
triangle

To remove a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the heat sink (see “Removing a microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 212).
9. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the heat-sink
retention module to the system board; then, lift the heat-sink retention module
from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the heat-sink retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 219

Installing a heat-sink retention module
Alignment
triangle

To install a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:

1. Place the heat-sink retention module in the microprocessor location on the
system board.
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
3. Install the heat sink (see “Installing a microprocessor and heat sink” on page
213).
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
4. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
6. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

220 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a microprocessor retention module

To remove a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the heat sink and the microprocessor (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on page 212).
9. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the
microprocessor retention module to the system board; then, lift the
microprocessor retention module from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 221

Installing a microprocessor retention module

To install a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:

1. Orient the triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor
retention module to the corresponding alignment triangle on the system board;
then, place the retention module on the system board.
2. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
3. Install the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Installing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 213).
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
4. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
6. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

222 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the system board

To remove the system board, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the left-side cover” on page
144).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
“Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 159).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see “Opening the
power-supply cage” on page 150).
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 167).
8. Remove the fan-cage assembly (see “Removing the fan-cage assembly” on
page 184).
9. Note where the cables are connected to the system board; then, disconnect
them.
10. Remove any of the following components that are installed on the system
board and put them in a safe, static-protective place:
v Adapters (see “Removing an adapter” on page 198).
v Extender card (see “Removing an extender card” on page 209).
v DIMMs (see “Removing a memory module” on page 174).

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 223

 v Microprocessors and heat sinks (see “Removing a microprocessor and heat
sink” on page 212).
v Battery (see “Removing the battery” on page 162).
11. Rotate the release lever toward the front of the chassis.
12. Slide the system board toward the front of the server to disengage the tabs
from the chassis; then, grasp the handles and carefully lift the system board
out of the server.
13. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the system board

To install the system board, complete the following steps:

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the system board from
the package.
2. Hold the system board by the handles and insert the system board into the
chassis at an angle; then, slide it toward the rear of the server.

Note: Make sure that none of the server cables are caught under the system
board.
3. Press down on the retention modules; then, rotate the release lever toward the
rear of the chassis to secure the system board.
4. Install any of the following components that you removed from the system
board:
v Microprocessors and heat sinks (see “Installing a microprocessor and heat
sink” on page 213).

224 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 v DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page 178).
v Extender card (see “Installing an extender card” on page 211).
v Adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 199)
v Battery (see “Installing the battery” on page 163).
5. Reconnect any cables to the system board that you disconnected during
removal (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 14 and “Internal
cable routing and connectors” on page 136).
6. Install the fan-cage assembly (see “Installing the fan-cage assembly” on page
185).
7. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 168).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see “Closing the
power-supply cage” on page 151).
9. Install the power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page
160).
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the left-side cover” on page
145).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 225

226 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions
The following configuration programs come with the server:
v Setup utility
The Setup utility (formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program) is part
of the IBM System x Server Firmware. Use it to change the startup-device
sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. For information about using
this program, see “Using the Setup utility” on page 229.
v Boot Selection Menu program
The Boot Selection Menu program is part of the IBM System x Server Firmware.
Use it to override the startup sequence that is set in the Setup utility and
temporarily assign a device to be first in the startup sequence.
v IBM ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide program provides software-setup tools and installation tools
that are designed for the server. Use this CD during the installation of the server
to configure basic hardware features, such as an integrated SAS controller with
RAID capabilities, and to simplify the installation of your operating system. For
information about obtaining and using this CD, see “Using the ServerGuide Setup
and Installation CD” on page 234.
v Integrated management module
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to
remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see “Using the
integrated management module” on page 236.
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the
integrated management module (IMM). You can use these features to access the
network remotely and to mount or unmount drives or images on the client
system. For information about how to enable the remote presence function, see
“Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture” on page 237.
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the
Gigabit Ethernet controller” on page 239.
v LSI Configuration Utility
Use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure the integrated SAS/SATA controller
with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For information
about using this program, see “Using the LSI Configuration Utility” on page 240.
The following table lists the server configurations and the applications that are
available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.
Table 13. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA LSI Utility (invoked from the MegaRAID Storage Manager
Controller (LSI 1068) Setup utility), ServerGuide (for monitoring storage only)
installed

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 227

 Table 13. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID
arrays (continued)
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager
Controller (LSI 1078) (MSM), MegaRAID BIOS (MSM)
installed Configuration Utility (press C
to start), ServerGuide

v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program

Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI settings
and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify UEFI
settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to access
the Setup utility. For more information about using this program, see “IBM
Advanced Settings Utility” on page 242.

Updating the firmware

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download
from the Web. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as server firmware,
vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor firmware
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3500 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.

Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.

When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing firmware
from a diskette or CD image.
v IBM System x Server Firmware code is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the IMM on the system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.
v SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the integrated SATA controller.
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA controller on the system
board.

228 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Using the Setup utility
Use the Setup utility, formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program, to
perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Resolve configuration conflicts

Starting the Setup utility

To start the Setup utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the

power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select the settings to view or change.

Setup utility menu choices

The following choices are on the Setup utility main menu. Depending on the version
of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these descriptions.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
– System Summary
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other choices in the Setup
utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
– Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 229

 – Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings. To configure
memory mirroring, select System Settings → Memory, and then select
Memory Channel Mode → Mirroring.
– Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote console
redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA
controller, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots. If you disable a device,
it cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it
(this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).
– Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
– Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT 19h
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable the UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are not UEFI-compliant.
– Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- POST Watchdog Timer
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- POST Watchdog Timer Value
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.
- Reboot System on NMI
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt
(NMI) occurs. Enabled is the default.
- Commands on USB Interface Preference
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address; specify
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP
address; and save the network changes.
- Reset IMM to Defaults
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the adapters and drivers in the
server that are compliant with EFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0.

230 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network options, such as the iSCSI,
PXE, and network devices. There might be additional configuration choices for
optional network devices that are compliant with UEFI 2.1 and later.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view the startup sequence or boot to devices. The server
starts from the first boot record that it finds.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, or change the device boot priority, boot from a
file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.
If the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
Wake on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and
then checks a network adapter.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to view the system-event log and the POST event log. For
more information about these logs, see “Event logs” on page 21.
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the system-event log. Also, after you complete a
repair or correct an error, clear the system-event log to turn off the system-error
LED on the front of the server.
– POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the error messages
in the POST event log.
– System Event Log
Select this choice to view the error messages in the system-event log.
– Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the system-event log.
v User Security
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” on page
232 for more information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup utility menu.
– Set Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. For more
information, see “Power-on password” on page 232.
– Clear Power-on Password
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. For more information, see
“Power-on password” on page 232.
– Set Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set,

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 231

 the full Setup utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator
password” on page 233.
– Clear Administrator Password
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,
see “Administrator password” on page 233.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.

Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup utility menu only.

If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup utility menu.

An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it

limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If you set only an administrator
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup utility menu.

If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full
Setup utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
password has access to only the limited Setup utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.

Power-on password
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will
not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.

If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of
the following ways:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.
v Change the position of the power-on password switch (enable switch 2 of the
system board switch block (SW6)) to bypass the power-on password check (see
the following illustration).
232 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Attention: Before you change any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn
off the server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the
safety information that begins on page “Safety” on page vii. Do not change
settings or move jumpers on any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are
not shown in this document.
While the server is turned off, move switch 2 of the switch block (SW6) to the On
position to enable the power-on password override. You can then start the server,
run the Setup utility, and reset the power-on password. You do not have to return
the switch to the previous position.
The power-on password override switch does not affect the administrator
password.

Administrator password
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set, you
must type the administrator password for access to the full Setup utility menu. You
can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the
password.

Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.

Using the Boot Selection Menu program

The Boot Selection Menu program is used to temporarily redefine the first startup
device without changing boot options or settings in the Setup utility.

To use the Boot Selection Menu program, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. Press F12 (Select Boot Device). If a bootable USB mass storage device is
installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk) is displayed.
4. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 233

 The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup utility.

Starting the backup server firmware

The system board contains a backup copy area for the IBM System x Server
Firmware (server firmware). This is a secondary copy of server firmware that you
update only during the process of updating server firmware. If the primary copy of
the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.

To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the
UEFI boot recovery jumper (JP6) in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).

Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the UEFI boot recovery
JP6 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).

Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD

The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD contains a setup and installation
program that is designed for your server. The ServerGuide program detects the
server model and optional hardware devices that are installed and uses that
information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide program
simplifies operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers and, in
some cases, installing them automatically.

You can download a free image of the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD or
purchase the CD from the ServerGuide fulfillment Web site at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/management/serverguide/sub.html. To download the free image, click IBM
Service and Support Site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

The ServerGuide program has the following features:

v An easy-to-use interface
v Diskette-free setup, and configuration programs that are based on detected
hardware
v ServeRAID Manager program, which configures your ServeRAID adapter or
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities
v Device drivers that are provided for the server model and detected hardware
v Operating-system partition size and file-system type that are selectable during
setup

ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are
supported on all server models.

The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled

startable (bootable) CD drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install the operating system.

234 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 The ServerGuide program performs the following tasks:
v Sets system date and time
v Detects the RAID adapter or controller and runs the SAS RAID configuration
program (with LSI chip sets for ServeRAID adapters only)
v Checks the microcode (firmware) levels of a ServeRAID adapter and determines
whether a later level is available from the CD
v Detects installed optional hardware devices and provides updated device drivers
for most adapters and devices
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported Windows operating systems
v Includes an online readme file with links to tips for hardware and
operating-system installation

Setup and configuration overview

When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
setup program provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server model.
On a server with a ServeRAID adapter or integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities, you can run the SCSI RAID configuration program to create logical
drives.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.

When you start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, the program prompts
you to complete the following tasks:
v Select your language.
v Select your keyboard layout and country.
v View the overview to learn about ServerGuide features.
v View the readme file to review installation tips for your operating system and
adapter.
v Start the operating-system installation. You will need your operating-system CD.

Typical operating-system installation

The ServerGuide program can reduce the time it takes to install an operating
system. It provides the device drivers that are required for your hardware and for
the operating system that you are installing. This section describes a typical
ServerGuide operating-system installation.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive controllers, and network adapters. Then, the program
checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored and then
passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
4. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD and
restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating system
takes control to complete the installation.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 235

Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the IBM Web
site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. From the menu on the left side of the page, click System x support search.
4. From the Task menu, select Install.
5. From the Product family menu, select System x3500 M2.
6. From the Operating system menu, select your operating system, and then click
Search to display the available installation documents.

Changing the Power Policy option to the default settings after loading
UEFI defaults
The default settings for the Power Policy option is set by the IMM. To change the
Power Policy option to the default settings, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select System Settings → Integrated Management Module → Reset IMM to
Defaults.
4. Wait several minutes while IMM initializes all of the default values.
5. Go back and check the Power Policy setting to verify that it is set to Restore
(the default).

Using the integrated management module

The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It
combines service processor functions, video controller, and remote presence
function in a single chip.

The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:

v Active Energy Manager.
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery.
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating
system hangs and the OS watchdog timer times out. The IMM might be
configured to watch for the OS watchdog timer and restart the server after a
timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the system administrator can

236 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 generate an NMI by pressing an NMI button on the system board for an
operating-system memory dump. ASR is supported by IPMI.
v Boot sequence manipulation.
v Command-line interface.
v Configuration save and restore.
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the
associated system-error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, and power supply failure.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs to report errors that occur with fans, power supplies,
microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.
v NMI detection and reporting.
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.
v PCI configuration data.
v PECI 2 support.
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control).
v Query power-supply input power.
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.
v Serial redirect.
v Serial over LAN (SOL).
v System-event log.
v When one of the two microprocessors reports an internal error, the server
disables the defective microprocessor and restarts with the one good
microprocessor.

The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities
through the OSA SMBridge management utility program:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file
as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.

Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture

The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM).

The remote presence feature provides the following functions:

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 237

 v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are
available for use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a
virtual drive

The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.

Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access

To access the Web interface and use the remote presence feature, you need the IP
address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address through the Setup utility.
To locate the IP address, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the

power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to access the full Setup utility menu.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup utility.

Logging on to the Web interface

To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the
following steps:
1. Open a Web browser and in the Address or URL field, type the IP address or
host name of the IMM to which you want to connect.
Notes:
a. If you are logging on to the IMM for the first time after installation, the IMM
defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM uses the default
static IP address 192.168.70.125.
b. You can obtain the DHCP-assigned IP address or the static IP address from
the server UEFI or from your network administrator.
The Login page is displayed.
2. Type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM for the first time,
you can obtain the user name and password from the system administrator. All
login attempts are documented in the event log. A welcome page opens in the
browser.

238 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not the letter O). You have read/write
access. For enhanced security, change this default password during the initial
configuration.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM logs you off the Web interface if your browser is inactive for
the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The browser opens the System Status
page, which displays the server status and the server health summary.

Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility

The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility is part of the server firmware. You can use it
to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize where the
network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and disable the
Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility from the Setup utility.

To enable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility, complete the following steps:
1. From the Setup utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press
Enter.
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard device(s) and press Enter.
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.
4. Select Enable and press Enter.
5. Exit to main menu and select Save Settings.

Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller

The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support auto-negotiation,
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and
automatically operate at that rate and mode.

You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. For
device drivers and information about configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the
Broadcom NetXtreme II Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the server.
To find updated information about configuring the controllers, complete the following
steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3500 M2 and click Go.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 239

Using the LSI Configuration Utility
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in
this document.

Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:
v Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive
v Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive
v Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives

The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.
You can use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID 1E (IME),
and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install a different type
of RAID adapter, follow the instructions in the documentation that comes with the
adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.

In addition, you can download an LSI command-line configuration program from

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage
arrays, consider the following information:
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following
features:
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks. All data on the
primary disk can be migrated.
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as
RAID 1E)
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight
disks. All data on the array disks will be deleted.
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All
data on the array disks will be deleted.
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for
attached devices.

Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program

To start the LSI Configuration Utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the

power-control button becomes active.

240 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.
4. Select Please refresh this page first and press Enter.
5. To perform storage-management tasks, see the SAS controller documentation,
which you can download from the disk controller and RAID software matrix:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, click System x.
c. Under Popular links, click Storage Support Matrix.

When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Formatting a hard disk drive

Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.

Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a
mirrored pair.

To format a drive, complete the following steps:

1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you
want to format and press Enter.
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or
the End key. Press Alt+D.
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.

Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives

To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for which you want to
create an array.
2. Select RAID Properties.
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.
4. In the RAID Disk column, use the Spacebar or Minus (-) key to select Yes
(select) or No (deselect) to select or deselect a drive from a RAID disk.
5. Continue to select drives, using the Spacebar or Minus (-) key, until you have
selected all the drives for your array.
6. Press C to create the disk array.
7. Select Save changes then exit this menu to create the array.
8. Exit the Setup utility.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 241

IBM Advanced Settings Utility
The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup
utility for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the server
to access the Setup utility.

You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.

In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.

Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.

For more information and to download the ASU program, go to

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Updating IBM Systems Director

If you plan to use IBM Systems Director to manage the server, you must check for
the latest applicable IBM Systems Director updates and interim fixes.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

To locate and install a newer version of IBM Systems Director, complete the
following steps:
1. Check for the latest version of IBM Systems Director:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/director/downloads.html.
b. If a newer version of IBM Systems Director than what comes with the server
is shown in the drop-down list, follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the latest version.
2. Install the IBM Systems Director program.

If your management server is connected to the Internet, to locate and install

updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On the Welcome page of the IBM Systems Director Web interface, click View
updates.
3. Click Check for updates. The available updates are displayed in a table.
4. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

If your management server is not connected to the Internet, to locate and install
updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On a system that is connected to the Internet, go to http://www.ibm.com/
eserver/support/fixes/fixcentral/.
3. From the Product family list, select IBM Systems Director.

242 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. From the Product list, select IBM Systems Director.
5. From the Installed version list, select the latest version, and click Continue.
6. Download the available updates.
7. Copy the downloaded files to the management server.
8. On the management server, on the Welcome page of the IBM Systems
Director Web interface, click the Manage tab, and click Update Manager.
9. Click Import updates and specify the location of the downloaded files that you
copied to the management server.
10. Return to the Welcome page of the Web interface, and click View updates.
11. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)

The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is
replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the UUID,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the UUID:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 243

 3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]
Where:
<uuid_value>
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.
[access_method]
The access method that you selected to use from the following
methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --user <user_id>
--password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.

Example:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>

244 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can
access the ASU Users Guide from the IBM Web site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand
the list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced
Settings Utility link.
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
--user <user_id> --password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 245

Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data
The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board
is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the DMI,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the DMI:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]
Where:

246 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
<m/t_model>
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyyy, where
xxxx is the machine type and yyy is the server model number.
<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the
serial number.
<asset_method>
The server asset tag number. Type asset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.
[access_method]
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --user <imm_user_id>
--password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 247

 Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip> --user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

248 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.

Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
in the Problem Determination and Service Guide on the IBM Documentation CD
that comes with your system.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check
for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a
request for information.

You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with IBM systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most systems, operating systems, and programs come with documentation that
contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error
codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating
system or program.

Using the documentation

Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and
help files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, some documents are available through the IBM Publications
Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/.

Getting help and information from the World Wide Web

On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
systems, optional devices, services, and support. The address for IBM System x®
and xSeries® information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/. The address for IBM
BladeCenter® information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/. The address
for IBM IntelliStation® information is http://www.ibm.com/intellistation/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 249

 You can find service information for IBM systems and optional devices at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Software service and support

Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with System x and xSeries servers,
BladeCenter products, IntelliStation workstations, and appliances. For information
about which products are supported by Support Line in your country or region, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.

For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through your IBM reseller or IBM Services. To
locate a reseller authorized by IBM to provide warranty service, go to
http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/ and click Find a Business Partner on the right
side of the page. For IBM support telephone numbers, see http://www.ibm.com/
planetwide/. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).

In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

IBM Taiwan product service

IBM Taiwan product service contact information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888

250 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both. If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first
occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol (® or ™), these symbols
indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this
information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law
trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the
Web at “Copyright and trademark information” at http://www.ibm.com/legal/
copytrade.shtml.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 251
 Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in the

United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.

Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in
the United States, other countries, or both.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other

countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of

others.

Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.

CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.

When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for
1 073 741 824 bytes.

When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands

for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.

Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives that are available from IBM.

Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an

optional memory module.

IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and

services that are ServerProven®, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered
and warranted solely by third parties.

IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.

Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.

252 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include
user manuals or all program functionality.

Electronic emission notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement

Notice to Customers

This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect

connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.

European Union EMC Directive conformance statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Appendix B. Notices 253

 This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: [email protected]

Taiwanese Class A warning statement

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen

Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG

zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

“Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen.”

254 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
von Geräten (EMVG)”. Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der
EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022

Klasse A.

People's Republic of China Class A warning statement

Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement

Korean Class A warning statement

Appendix B. Notices 255

256 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Index
Numerics configuration
cable routing 141
2.5-inch disk drive backplane
minimum 125
installing 195
programs, LSI Configuration Utility 227
removing 194
updating server 227
2.5-inch drive cage
with ServerGuide 235
installing 197
connectors
removing 196
extender cards 15
hard disk drive backplane 19
light path diagnostic panel 10
A on front of server 9
AC power LED 12 on rear of server 12
adapter system board 14
boot option 199 controller, configuring Ethernet 239
installing 199 cover
PCI bus, identification 199 installing 145
removing 198 removing 144
types and installation information 199 CPU 1 error LED 81
administrator password 231 CPU 2 error LED 82
Advanced Settings Utility (ASU), overview 242 CPU LED 78
air baffle 167, 168 CPU mismatch LED 82
ASM event log 22 creating, RAID array 241
assertion event, system-event log 22 CRUs, installing
assistance, getting 249 air baffle 168
Attached Disk Test 60 battery 163
attention notices 6 bezel 146, 147, 182
DVD drive 166
fan-cage assembly 185
B fans 158
backplane connectors 19 front adapter-retention bracket 173
battery hot-swap hard disk drive 156
failure LED 82 left-side cover 145
installing 163 memory module 178
removing 162 power supply 160
bays 8 power-supply cage 150, 151
bezel rear adapter retention bracket 172
closing 147 voltage regulator module 170
installing 182 CRUs, removing
opening 146 air baffle 167
removing 180 battery 162
BIOS update failure 123 bezel 146, 147, 180
blue-screen capture feature, overview 238 DVD drive 165
boot selection menu program, using 233 fan-cage assembly 184
fans 157
front adapter-retention bracket 173
C hot-swap hard disk drive 154
cable routing, internal 136 left-side cover 144
cache 8 memory module 174
caution statements 6 power supply 159
checkout procedure 57, 58 power-supply cage 150, 151
Class A electronic emission notice 253 rear adapter-retention bracket 171
closing tape drive 186
bezel 147 USB cable and light path diagnostics
power-supply cage 151 assembly 190, 192
CNFG LED 77 voltage regulator module 169
code updates 2 customer replaceable units (CRUs) 128
collecting data 1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 257

D errors
format, diagnostic code 86
danger statements 6
messages, diagnostic 86
DASD LED 76
Ethernet
data collection 1
connector 12
DC power LED 12
controller, configuring 239
deassertion event, system-event log 22
controller, troubleshooting 124
diagnostic
enabling Broadcom utility 239
error codes 87
LEDs 12
on-board programs, starting 86
event logs 21
programs, overview 86
expansion
test log, viewing 87
bays 8
text message format 86
slots 8
tools, overview 21
extender card
dimensions 8
installing 211
DIMM
LEDs 18
installation sequence for memory mirroring 177
removing 209
installing 175, 178
LED 81
problems 63
removing 174
F
display problems 65 fan
drives 8 hot-swap 8
DSA installing 158
log 22, 87 LED 75
preboot messages 87 removing 157
DVD fan-cage
cable routing 142 assembly, installing 185
drive activity LED 10 assembly, removing 184
drive problems 59 FCC Class A notice 253
drive, installing 166 features 7
drive, removing 165 IMM 236
eject button 10 remote presence 237
error symptoms 59 ServerGuide 235
field replaceable units (FRUs) 128
firmware
E recovery from update failure 123
updates 234
electrical input 8
updating 228
electronic emission Class A notice 253
formatting a hard disk drive 241
environment 8
front adapter-retention bracket
error codes and messages
installing 173
diagnostic 87
removing 173
IMM 32
FRUs, installing
POST 24
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 195
error symptoms
2.5-inch drive cage 197
CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive 59
adapter 199
general 60
extender card 211
hard disk drive 60
heat-sink retention module 220
intermittent 61
microprocessor 213
keyboard, non-USB 61
microprocessor retention module 222
memory 63
operator information panel assembly 203
microprocessor 64
power-supply cage 206
monitor 65
system board 224
mouse, non-USB 61
FRUs, removing
optional devices 67
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 194
pointing device, non-USB 61
2.5-inch drive cage 196
power 68
adapter 198
serial port 69
extender card 209
ServerGuide 70
heat-sink retention module 219
software 70
microprocessor 212
USB port 71
microprocessor retention module 221

258 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
FRUs, removing (continued) installing (continued)
operator information panel assembly 202 light path diagnostics assembly 192
power-supply cage 204 memory 175
system board 223 memory module 178
microprocessor 213
microprocessor retention module 222
G operator information panel assembly 203
general problems 60 power supply 160
getting help 249 power-supply cage 206
gigabit Ethernet controller, configuring 239 rear adapter retention bracket 172
grease, thermal 218 system board 224
tape drive 187
USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly 192
H VRM 170
H8 heartbeat LED 83 integrated functions 8
hard disk drive intermittent problems 61
activity LED 9, 10 internal cable routing 136
backplane cabling 138 IP address, obtaining for Web interface 238
backplane connectors 19 IPMI event log 21
diagnostic tests, types of 60
formatting 241
installing 156 J
LED 76 jumpers 16
problems 60
removing 154
status LED 10 K
types 155 keyboard problems 61
hardware service and support 250
heat output 8
heat-sink retention module L
installing 220 LEDs
removing 219 extender cards 18
help, getting 249 front of server 9
humidity 8 light path diagnostic panel 10
light path diagnostics 74
light path diagnostics, viewing without power 72
I operator information panel 72
IBM Advanced Settings Utility, overview 242 power-supply 13, 84
IBM Support Line 250 power-supply detected problems 13, 84
IBM Systems Director, updating 242 rear of server 12
IMM system board 17
error messages 32 LEDs, light path
event log 22 battery failure 82
heartbeat LED 83 CNFG 77
using 236 CPU 78
important notices 6 CPU 1 error 81
installing CPU 2 error 82
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 195 CPU mismatch 82
2.5-inch drive cage 197 DASD 76
adapter 199 DIMM 81
air baffle 168 fan 75
battery 163 H8 heartbeat 83
bezel 182 IMM heartbeat 83
DVD drive 166 LOG 74
extender card 211 MEM 77
fan-cage assembly 185 NMI 76
fans 158 PCI bus 75
front adapter-retention bracket 173 PCI slot error 83
heat-sink retention module 220 power supply 75
hot-swap hard disk drive 156 SP 79
left-side cover 145 System Board 75

Index 259
LEDs, light path (continued) notes, important 252
system-board error 82 notices 251
TEMP 74 electronic emission 253
VRM 78 FCC, Class A 253
VRM failure 82 notices and statements 6
left-side cover
installing 145
removing 144 O
light path diagnostics obtaining IP address for Web interface 238
cable routing 143 online
installing assembly 192 publications 6
LEDs 72 service request 4
panel, LEDs and connectors 10 opening
power-supply LEDs 84 bezel 146
LOG LED 74 power-supply cage 150
logs operating system installation
system event message 32 with ServerGuide 235
LSI Configuration Utility without ServerGuide 236
overview 240 operator information panel
starting 240 assembly, installing 203
assembly, removing 202
cable routing 143
M LEDs 72
MEM LED 77 optical drive power cable routing 136
memory 8 optional device problems 67
installing 175 ordering consumable parts 130
memory mirroring
description 176
DIMM population sequence 177 P
memory module parts listing 128
installing 178 password
removing 174 administrator 233
memory problems 63 power-on 232
menu choices in Setup utility 229 PCI
messages bus LED 75
diagnostic 86 extender card slots 199
diagnostic programs 21 slot error LEDs 83
diagnostic text 86 slots 199
IMM error 32 PCI slots
POST error 21 extender cards 15
POST event viewer 231 POST
system-event 32 error codes 24
microprocessor 8 error messages 21
heat sink 216 event log 21
installing 213 event viewer 231
problems 64 Watchdog Timer 230
removing 212 power
type and installation information 213 cords 130
microprocessor retention module error LED 12
installing 222 LED 9
removing 221 policy option 236
minimum configuration 125 problems 68, 124
mirroring mode 176 requirement 8
monitor problems 65 power supply 8
mouse problems 61 cage, closing 151
cage, installing 206
cage, opening 150
N cage, removing 204
NMI LED 76 installing 160
noise emissions 8 LED 75
notes 6 LEDs 84

260 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide
power supply (continued) removing (continued)
LEDs and detected problems 84 microprocessor 212
removing 159 microprocessor retention module 221
power-control button 9 operator information panel assembly 202
power-control-button shield 9 power supply 159
power-cord connector 12 power-supply cage 204
power-on rear adapter-retention bracket 171
password 232 system board 223
password setting 231 tape drive 186
power-supply LEDs 13 USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly 190
power-supply LEDs and detected problems 13 voltage regulator module 169
problems RETAIN tips 3
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM drive 59
DIMM 63
Ethernet controller 124 S
general 60 safety information
hard disk drive 60 Statement 13 xvi
IMM 32 Statement 15 xvi
intermittent 61 SAS power cable routing 141
memory 63 scan order 199
microprocessor 64 SCSI Attached Disk Test 60
monitor 65 serial
mouse 61 connector 13
optional devices 67 port problems 69
POST 24 server
power 68, 124 configuration, updating 227
serial port 69 firmware, starting backup 234
ServerGuide 70 replaceable units 128
software 70 ServeRAID-BR10i cable connectors 137
undetermined 125 ServeRAID-MR10i cable connector 139
USB port 71 ServerGuide
publications 5 features 235
problems 70
using 234
R using to install operating system 235
RAID array, creating 241 service
rear adapter retention bracket calling for 126
installing 172 request, online 4
removing 171 setup and configuration with ServerGuide 235
recovering Setup utility
BIOS update failure 123 menu choices 229
UEFI update failure 123 starting 229
remote presence feature using 229
using 237 size 8
removing slots 8
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 194 software problems 70
2.5-inch drive cage 196 software service and support 250
adapter 198 SP LED 79
air baffle 167 specifications 7
battery 162 stabilizing feet, turning 153
bezel 180 starting
DVD drive 165 backup server firmware 234
extender card 209 LSI Configuration Utility 240
fan-cage assembly 184 Setup utility 229
fans 157 statements and notices 6
front adapter-retention bracket 173 support, web site 249
heat-sink retention module 219 switch block 6 switches 16
hot-swap hard disk drive 154 switches 16
left-side cover 144 system
light path diagnostics assembly 190 error LED 10
memory module 174 event log 32

Index 261
system (continued) using (continued)
information LED 10 ServerGuide 234
locator LED 10 Setup utility 229
management connector 13
system board
external connectors 18 V
installing 224 video
internal connectors 14, 16 connector 13
jumpers and switches 16 problems 65
LED 75 viewing event logs 22
LEDs 17 voltage regulator module
removing 223 installing 170
system-board error LED 82 removing 169
system-event log 21 VRM
Systems Director, updating 242 failure LED 82
installation 217
installing 170
T LED 78
tape drive removing 169
cable routing 136
installing 187
removing 186 W
test 117 Web interface
telephone numbers 250 logging on to 238
TEMP LED 74 obtaining IP address 238
temperature 8 web site
test log, viewing 87 publication ordering 249
tests, hard disk drive diagnostic 60 ServerGuide 234
thermal grease 218 support 249
tier 1 CRUs 154 support line, telephone numbers 250
tier 2 CRUs 174 weight 8
tools, diagnostic 21
trademarks 251
troubleshooting procedures 3
troubleshooting tables 59
turning, stabilizing feet 153

U
UEFI update failure 123
undetermined problems 125
undocumented problems 4
United States electronic emission Class A notice 253
United States FCC Class A notice 253
Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 71
UpdateXpress 3
updating
firmware 228
IBM Systems Director 242
server configuration 227
USB
connector 10
connectors 13
port problems 71
USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
installing 192
removing 190
using
boot selection menu program 233
LSI Configuration Utility 240
remote presence feature 237

262 IBM System x3500 M2 Type 7839: Problem Determination and Service Guide



Part Number: 46M1497

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 46M1497